1
Download Samsung PL50 دليل المستخدم
Transcript
PL50 User Manual ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ،ﻗﻢﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖﺃﻭﻻ ﹰﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥﻳﺘﻢﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﺫﻟﻚ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﺰﻧﺔﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺇﻟﻰﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻢﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻛﺐﻛﺎﺑﻞ64# ﺭﻛﺐﻛﺎﺑﻞ64#ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖﻓﻲﻣﻨﻔﺬ64#ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺮﻑﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ64#ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖﻣﻦﻃﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻓﺤﺺﻃﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺪﺩ>ﻗﺮﺹﻗﺎﺑﻞﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ< tﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻻﻗﺘﻨﺎﺋﻚ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﱋ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ tﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝﻋﻠﻰﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕﻣﺎﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ،ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺇﺣﻀﺎﺭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻭﺳﺒﺐﻣﺎﺑﻬﺎﻣﻦﺧﻠﻞ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﺍﻟﺦﺇﻟﻰﻣﺮﻛﺰﺧﺪﻣﺔﻣﺎﺑﻌﺪﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ tﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞﻗﺒﻞﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉﻓﻲﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﺸﻜﻞﺻﺤﻴﺢﻗﺒﻞﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻮﻱﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕﺃﻭﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺜﻼﹰﲡﻨﺒﺎ ﹰﻟﻌﺪﻡﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽﳊﺎﻟﺔﻣﻦﺧﻴﺒﺔﺍﻷﻣﻞﻣﻦﺟﺮﺍﺀﻋﺪﻡﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﺸﻜﻞﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﱋ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆﺑﻬﺬﺍﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞﻓﻲﻣﻜﺎﻥﺁﻣﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓﺃﻧﻪﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﺃﺣﺪﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕﻟﻨﺴﺦﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲﺍﳋﺎﺹﺑﻚ ،ﻓﻘﺪﺗﺘﻠﻒﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻧﻘﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺇﻟﻰﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲﺍﳋﺎﺹﺑﻚ،ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ64#ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻤﺎﻳﺮﺟﻰﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔﺍﳌﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔﻋﻦﺃﻱﺧﺴﺎﺋﺮﺃﻭ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭﻗﺪﺗﻠﺤﻖﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺃﻱﻣﻦﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ tﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢﺑﺪﻭﻥﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﻣﺴﺒﻖﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ xﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ.JDSPTPGU8JOEPXTﻭ8JOEPXTﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ.JDSPTPGU$PSQPSBUJPOﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ xﺗﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ "EPCFﻭ3FBEFSﻋﻼﻣﺘﲔ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺘﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﲔ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺘﲔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ xﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﻭﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓﺑﻬﺬﺍﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞﻫﻲﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔﺧﺎﺻﺔﺑﺄﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ &91-03&3ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 8JOEPXTﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ >ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ< ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺧﻄﺮ ﲢﺬﻳﺮ ﺧﻄﺮﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﻫﺬﺍﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢﻟﻴﺪﻝﻋﻠﻰﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺳﻴﻨﺘﺞﻋﻨﻪ،ﺇﺫﺍﻟﻢﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻼﺷﻴﻪ،ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻮﻓﺎﺓﺃﻭﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ tﺧﻄﺮﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢﻟﻴﺪﻝﻋﻠﻰﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔﺳﻴﻨﺘﺞﻋﻨﻪ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢﻳﺘﻢﺗﻼﺷﻴﻪ، ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔﻻ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡﺑﺬﻟﻚﺇﻟﻰﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔﺃﻭﺻﺪﻣﺔﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔﺃﻭﺇﳊﺎﻕﺿﺮﺭﺑﺎﻟﻎﺑﻚﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲﺃﻥﺗﺘﻢﻛﺎﻓﺔﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔﻭﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻓﻘﻂﻣﻦﻗﺒﻞﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊﺍﻟﺬﻱﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻪﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞﺃﻭﻟﺪﻯﻣﺮﻛﺰﺧﺪﻣﺔﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﱋ ﲢﺬﻳﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢﻟﻴﺪﻝﻋﻠﻰﻣﻮﻗﻒﺧﻄﻴﺮﻗﺪﻳﻨﺘﺞﻋﻨﻪ،ﺇﺫﺍﻟﻢﻳﺘﻢﺗﻼﺷﻴﻪ،ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽﻟﻠﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ tﻻﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺿﻮﺀﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵﻋﻠﻰﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓﻣﻦﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹﺃﻭﺍﳊﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓﻣﻦﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻗﺪﻳﺆﺩﻱﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﳊﺎﻕﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻎﺑﺎﻟﺒﺼﺮ tﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﺠﺮﺓ ،ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚﺇﻟﻰﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓﺧﻄﺮﺣﺪﻭﺙﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ tﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ،ﺛﻢﺍﻓﺼﻞﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔﻭﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦﻋﻠﻴﻚﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝﺑﺎﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖﻣﻨﻪﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞﻭﻻﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮﻓﻲﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺣﻴﺚﻗﺪﻳﺆﺩﻱﺫﻟﻚﺇﻟﻰﺣﺪﻭﺙﺣﺮﻳﻖﺃﻭﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ tﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎﻛﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﺃﻭﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕﻓﻘﺪﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ tﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﻳ ﹴﺪ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ tﻟﺪﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ،ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺗﻪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﹰﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﺽﻷﻱ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﻱ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ،ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞﻓﻲﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ،ﺍﺗﺮﻙﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﺪﻭﻥﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﻟﺒﻀﻊﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ tﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ،ﻛﺎﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ، ﺃﻭﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺃﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎﻣﻦﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦﺍﻟﺘﻲﺗﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓﻓﻲﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓﺣﻴﺚﻗﺪﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﹰﻋﻠﻰﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪﻳﻨﺠﻢﻋﻦﺫﻟﻚﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ tﻳﺤﺬﺭ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ، ﻣﻤﺎﻗﺪﻳﺆﺩﻱﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙﺗﺸﻮﻩﺑﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺃﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙﺣﺮﻳﻖﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺗﻬﺎﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍﺀ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﻫﺬﺍﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢﻟﻴﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰﻣﻮﻗﻒﺧﻄﻴﺮﻗﺪﻳﻨﺘﺞﻋﻨﻪ ،ﺇﺫﺍﻟﻢﻳﺘﻢﺗﻼﺷﻴﻪ،ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔﺃﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ tﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔﺍﳌﺴﺮﺑﺔ،ﺃﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎﺑﺸﻜﻞﻣﻔﺮﻁ ﺃﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ،ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙﺣﺮﻳﻖﺃﻭﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻟﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ tﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓﺁﻛﻠﺔﺗﺆﺩﻱﺇﻟﻰﺇﺗﻼﻑﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﺸﻜﻞﻣﺴﺘﺪﻳﻢ tﻻ ﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺘﻪ ﻟﻸﻳﺪﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓﻓﻘﺪﻳﺆﺩﻱﺫﻟﻚﺇﻟﻰﺣﺪﻭﺙﺣﺮﻭﻕ tﻻ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ، ﻗﻢﺩﺍﺋﻤﹰﺎﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭﺛﻢﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦﻓﺼﻞﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙﺃﻭﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﺒﻞﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺣﻴﺚﺇﻥﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡﺑﺬﻟﻚﻗﺪﻳﺆﺩﻱﺇﻟﻰﺇﺗﻼﻑﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙﺃﻭﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕﻭﻳﻨﺘﺞﻋﻨﻪﺣﺪﻭﺙﺣﺮﻳﻖﺃﻭﺻﺪﻣﺔﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ tﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙﺧﻠﻞﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ tﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕﺃﻋﻄﺎﻻ ﹰﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓﻣﺎﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔﻓﻲﺩﺭﺟﺔﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ tﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﺻﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕﺫﺍﺕﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏﻣﻦﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ tﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻨﹰﺎ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ 64#ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﺑﺪﹰﺍﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥﻣﻦ ﺳﻨﹰﺎ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ 64#ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﻄﻂﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﻳﹸﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ ﺯﺭ ﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﳌﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﳌﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﲟﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ %*4 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﻣﻘﻄﻊﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢﺑﺪﻭﻥﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻣﻮﺭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺯﺭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ %*41ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻗﻔﻞﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﳝﲔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲤﻜﲔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ *40 ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ "$# ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻧﻐﻤﺔﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ '" ﺻﻮﺭﺓﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺻﻒﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺳﻄﻮﻉﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻧﻮﻉﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﳕﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﻣﻘﻄﻊﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ %*41 ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺿﻮﺀﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ 64# ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ '%10 ﻧﺴﺦ 1JDU#SJEHF 1JDU#SJEHFﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 1JDU#SJEHFﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ 1JDU#SJEHFﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮ 087 087 088 089 091 094 095 098 098 099 ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ Samsung Master ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ USBﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ MAC ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ USBﻣﻊﻧﻈﺎﻡﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﻣﺎﻛﻴﻨﺘﻮﺵMAC ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝﻋﻠﻰﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔﻗﺒﻞﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻫﺬﺍﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ.ﻗﺪﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ. ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﺍﺗﺼﻞﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﺑﺎﺋﻊﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﱋﺃﻭﲟﺮﻛﺰﺧﺪﻣﺔﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﱋ.ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀﻭﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺭﲟﺎﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒﻋﻦﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ. ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ /ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ USB ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ �ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (88 ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ،ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﹸﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ SD/SDHC/ ) MMCﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (16 ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ AV 007 ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﳌﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺰﺍﻡ ﳌﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺯﺭ .&/6 ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ 64#ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ 'Oﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻣﺆﻗﺖﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﳝﲔ ﺯﺭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺯﺭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﲡﻮﻳﻒ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﳌﺒﺔﺑﻴﺎﻥﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺭﺟﻊﺇﻟﻰﺻﻔﺤﺔﳌﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﳌﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺛﻮﺍ ﹴﻥ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﻣﺾﳌﺒﺔﺑﻴﺎﻥﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔﺧﻼﻝ ﺁﺧﺮﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲﻣﻦﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺗﻮﻣﺾﳌﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻥﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﳌﺪﺓﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲﻣﻦﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺳﻴﺘﻢﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺻﻮﺭﺓﺑﻌﺪﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲﺛﻮﺍﻥﹴ،ﻭﺑﻌﺪﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ،ﻳﺘﻢﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐﺣﺮﻛﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﳌﺒﺔﺑﻴﺎﻥﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﻃﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺒﺔﺛﻢﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﺗﻜﻮﻥﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﻣﺾﺍﻟﻠﻤﺒﺔﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﻔﻆﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻟﺘﻲﰎﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎﺛﻢﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﺗﻜﻮﻥﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺷﺤﻦﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻠﻤﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐﻛﺎﺑﻞ64#ﻓﻲﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻀﻲﺀﺍﻟﻠﻤﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔﺑﻌﺪﺑﺪﺀﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻧﻘﻞﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻮﻣﺾﺍﻟﻠﻤﺒﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ64#ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻠﻤﺒﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻠﻤﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ %*4 ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﺺ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﺠﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﻃﺊ ﻭﺛﻠﺞ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻳﺘﻢﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻠﻤﺒﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺗﻮﻣﺾﺍﻟﻠﻤﺒﺔ ﺗﻮﻣﺾﺍﻟﻠﻤﺒﺔ ﻻﺗﻘﻮﻡﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﲟﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ"4-#ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ "4-# ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻳﻞ "4-# ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ 7 ﻣﺪﺓﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ 64#ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ، ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "4-# ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔﺷﺤﻨﺎ ﹰﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ، ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ،ﺣﺠﻢﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ، ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﲔ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﲔ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻭﺗﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦﺣﺠﻢﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ¨ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ xﰎ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﱋ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕﻫﺎﻣﺔﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ tﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ tﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕﺷﺤﻨﺘﻬﺎﲟﺮﻭﺭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥﻋﺮﺿﺔﻟﻠﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻠﺖﺩﺍﺧﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﻣﻦﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦﺃﻥﺗﺆﺛﺮﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻗﻞﻣﻦﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔﻋﻠﻰﺃﺩﺍﺀﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ،ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺿﺎ ﹰﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎ ﹰﻓﻲﻋﻤﺮﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔﻣﻦﺟﺮﺍﺀﺫﻟﻚ tﺗﻌﻤﻞﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﺓﺑﺸﻜﻞﺟﻴﺪﻓﻲﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ tﻗﺪﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊﺩﺭﺟﺔﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓﺟﺴﻢﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲﻻﺷﻲﺀﻓﻴﻪﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﻳﻞﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ Àﻭﺻﻞﻛﺎﺑﻞﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ64# ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ64# ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ 64# ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﲟﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ tﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﲤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ 64# tﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ64#ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ tﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ 64#ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ tﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ tﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ 64#ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ 64#ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ tﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ 64#ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻ ﻳﻔﻲ ﲟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻭﻣﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ،ﻓﺮﲟﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ tﻗﺒﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ ،ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻀﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﳌﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ،ﻓﺒﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ tﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻨﺎ ﹰ ﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﳌﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﲟﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﳌﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻥﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﳌﺒﺔﺑﻴﺎﻥﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﳌﺒﺔﺑﻴﺎﻥﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔﺍﳋﻀﺮﺍﺀ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﳌﺒﺔﺑﻴﺎﻥﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﺤﻮﻝﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﻧﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔﻣﻀﺎﺀﺓ tﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ،ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴ ﹰﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻮﺻﻼﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﲟﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻳﺮﺟﻰﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦﻗﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺓﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱﺫﻟﻚﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﻏﻄﺎﺀﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺟﻌﻞ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ-$%ﻭﺃﺳﻨﺎﻥﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﳉﺰﺀﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄﺣﻴﺚﻗﺪﻳﺆﺩﻱﺫﻟﻚﺇﻟﻰﺇﺗﻼﻑﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺷﺤﻨﺎ ﹰﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﺷﺤﻨﺔﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻗﻢﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺷﺤﻨﺔﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻗﻢﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ xﻋﻨﺪﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓﺃﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺩﺓﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ،ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔﻋﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ tﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﰎﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ ﹰﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﲢﺘﻮﻱﻋﻠﻰﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻﳝﻜﻦﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎﺃﻭﲢﺘﻮﻱﻋﻠﻰﺻﻮﺭﰎﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺃﺧﺮﻯ tﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ tﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺳﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺷﺮﺍﺀﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓﺃﻥﺿﻤﺎﻥﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞﻻﻳﻐﻄﻲﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙﺃﻭﺑﻼﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ tﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻻ ﺗﺜﻦ ،ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎﻷﻱﺗﺼﺎﺩﻡﺃﻭﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙﻋﻨﻴﻒ tﻻ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻀﻢ ﻣﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﻛﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔﺃﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ tﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ tﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻸﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻗﻄﻌﺔﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔﻣﻦﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ tﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ tﻗﺪ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﺩﻑﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ tﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ tﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ tﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ tﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ؛ ﻛﺎﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹﺍﻟﻤﺮﻧﺔ،ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ،ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔﺍﻟﺦ tﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻈﻬﺮﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ>ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ<ﻭﻟﻦﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ،ﻗﻢﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ tﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻟﻤﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ 4%4%)$ﻭ ..$ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ 4%ﺳﻌﺔ ،(#ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥﺳﻌﺔﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﺎﻳﻠﻲﻫﺬﻩﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺑﻌﺪﺓﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﻧﻮﻉﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺠﻢﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻥﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔﻣﻦﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﺼﻖﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ >ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ 4%ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ< tﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ 4%4%)$ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺰﻟﻖ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡﺇﻟﻰﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲﻣﻦﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ 4%4%)$ ﺗﺘﻢﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡﺇﻟﻰﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،4%4%)$ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ tﻗﻢﺑﺰﻟﻖﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡﺇﻟﻰﺍﳉﺰﺀﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱﻣﻦﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ 4%4%)$ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ '14 '14 ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ h ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ h ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ h ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ h tﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ tﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ tﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺷﺤﻨﺎ ﹰ ﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ -$%ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ،ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ،ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔﻗﺒﻞﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ > <%BUF5JNFﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞﻳﺴﺎﺭﻳﻤﻴﻨﺜﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ 0, :English Language :09/01/01 Date & Time yyyy mm dd yyyy/mm/dd 13:00 Back 2009 / 01 / 01 Exit ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ > <-BOHVBHFﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ0, :English English :08/12/01 䚐ạ㛨 Language xﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ،،ﺍ ﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ Date & Time Français Deutsch Español Italiano Set Back ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺭﻣﺰﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺭﻣﺰﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ 6 ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 7 ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 8 ﻣﺆﻗﺖﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 9 ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 10 ﻣﺤﺪﺩﻧﻤﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 11 ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ rﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ r ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦrﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 5 12 ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ 14 ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ 15 ﲢﺬﻳﺮﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 16 ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 13 >ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ< ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺭﻣﺰﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ 0001 ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ 00:00:00 ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 2009/01/01 01:00 PM ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 17 ﻭﺿﻊﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 18 ﺍﳊﺪﺓ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 19 ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 20 ﺣﺠﻢﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 21 *40 ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 22 ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 23 ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭﻱ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺕ'" ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ -BOHVBHF ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺕ'" ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ'" ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ'" ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊﲢﺪﻳﺪﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺯﺭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﻓﻲﺍﳉﺰﺀﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﻫﺬﺍﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔﺑﺄﺩﻧﻰﺣﺪﻣﻦﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻊﺿﻮﻟﺍ ﺭﺯ ﻣﺎﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﺔﻴﻔﻴﻛ ﺪﻳﺪﺤﺘﻟﺍ ﺔﻄﻘﻧ ﻰﻟﺇ ﻊﺿﻮﻟﺍ ﺭﺯ ﺓﺭﺍﺩﺈﺑ ﺮﻳﻮﺼﺘﻟﺍ ﻊﺿﻭ ﺩﺪﺣ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻢﻠﻴﻓ ﻊﻄﻘﻣ ﻊﺿﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺪﻳﺪﺤﺘﻟﺍ ﺔﻄﻘﻧ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﲢﺘﻮﻱﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ، ﺃﻧﺖﻟﺴﺖﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓﺣﻴﺚﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔﻋﻠﻰﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔﺇﺫﺍﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔﺃﻣﺎﺇﺫﺍﰎﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ"650ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ %*4 ﻲﺋﺎﻘﻠﺗ ﻊﺿﻭ ﺞﻣﺎﻧﺮﺑ ﻊﺿﻭ ﺇﺫﺍﲢﻮﻝﻟﻮﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲﺇﻟﻰﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﺗﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺼﻔﻪ ،ﻓﻬﺬﺍﻳﻌﻨﻲﺃﻥﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﻓﻲﻫﺬﻩﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺻﻮﺭﺓﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺟﻨﺐﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔﺃﻱﻣﻦﻋﺪﺳﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺃﻭﺿﻮﺀﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺆﺩﻱﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲﺇﻟﻰﺿﺒﻂﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻋﻠﻰﺃﻓﻀﻞﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﳝﻜﻨﻚﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔﻛﺎﻓﺔﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻴﻤﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺘﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔﻓﺘﺤﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ %*4 %JHJUBM*NBHF4UBCJMJ[BUJPO ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ %*4 ﺳﻴﻘﻠﻞﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﻣﻦﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻭﺳﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙﻋﻠﻰﺻﻮﺭﺓﺟﻴﺪﺓﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽﻓﻲﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑﺍﳌﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ %*4ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ %*4 ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ %*4 ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺃﺳﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ،ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ %*4 ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﳌﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽﻣﺆﺷﺮﲢﺬﻳﺮﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻒﺍﻟﺘﻲﻻﻳﻈﻬﺮﻓﻴﻬﺎﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﻣﻦﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺎﹰ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔﹰ ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻷﻥ %*4ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻠﻴﻼﹰ ﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ tﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﳝﻜﻦﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﻳﻜﻮﻥﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺻﻌﺐ tﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﳝﻜﻦﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎﻋﻨﺪﺍﻫﺰﺍﺯﻣﺸﻬﺪﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ tﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡﻓﻲﻣﻜﺎﻥﻣﻈﻠﻢ tﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﳝﻜﻦﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﺿﺒﻂﺳﻄﻮﻉﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ tﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﻋﻠﻰﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰﺣﻠﻮﻝﻟﻠﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲﳝﻜﻦﺃﻥ ﲢﺪﺙﺧﻼﻝﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡﻭﲤﻜﲔﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﻣﻦﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕﻳﺘﻢﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﺗﻜﻮﻥﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺧﺎﺭﺝﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕﻳﺘﻢﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﺗﻜﻮﻥﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺧﺎﺭﺝﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻟﻴﻞﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦﻓﺤﺺﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒﺯﺭﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﻀﺮﻧﺠﺢﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺣﻤﺮﻓﺸﻞﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺷﺮﻁﻣﺴﺒﻖﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒﺯﺭﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻷﳝﻦﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭ0, ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﻋﻠﻰﻫﺪﻑﻳﺒﻌﺪﺳﻢﺃﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰﻫﺪﻑﻳﺒﻌﺪ ﺃﻗﻞﻣﻦﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭﺟﻪﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻷﳝﻦﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭ0, ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻷﻋﻠﻰﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ (VJEFMJTU ﻋﻨﺪﻧﺠﺎﺡﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍﻓﺸﻞﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ،ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂﺣﺘﻰﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺒﺪﺃﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔﻋﻨﺪﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭ 0, (VJEFMJTU > ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﳝﻜﻦﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﻳﻜﻮﻥﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺻﻌﺐ < ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ xﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.&/6ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﻓﻲﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔﺃﻓﻀﻞﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐﻣﻊﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﻣﻦﻣﻮﺍﻗﻒﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﻴﻤﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔﺿﻤﻦﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ >ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ< >ﻟﻴﻞ< ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﻓﻲﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔﺃﻓﻀﻞﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐﻣﻊﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﻣﻦﻣﻮﺍﻗﻒﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﳝﲔﻳﺴﺎﺭﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔﺍﳉﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻗﺮﺹﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﺍﳌﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ=ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ< ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ< ﺃﻭ >ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ< ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﳝﲔﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﳑﻴﺰﺍﺕ>ﺩﺭﺟﺔﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ<ﺃﻭ>ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ<ﺛﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ0, ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻤﺔﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ >ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺺ< ﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺺ >ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ< ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙﺑﺴﻌﺮﺓ،ﻋﻠﻰﺳﺒﻴﻞﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ >ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ< ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ >ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ< ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻛﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳊﺸﺮﺍﺕ >ﻧﺺ< ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ >ﻏﺮﻭﺏ< ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ >ﻓﺠﺮ< ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﺰﻭﻍ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺮ >ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ< ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻇﻼﻝ ﻧﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﲟﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰﺎ ﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻦﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ >ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ< >ﺷﺎﻃﺊ ﻭﺛﻠﺞ< ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ ﻭﺍﳉﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ>ﺩﻟﻴﻞﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ< ﻗﻢﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ>ﺩﻟﻴﻞﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ<ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻣﻦﺷﺨﺺﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺻﻮﺭﺓﻟﻚ ﻣﻦﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻗﻢﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮﺩﻟﻴﻞﺣﻮﻝﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻭﺿﻊ>ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ< ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺘﻼﺀﻡﻣﻊﺑﻴﺌﺔﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﻮﻡﻫﺬ ﻭﻣﻊﺫﻟﻚ،ﻓﻲﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻟﻴﻠﻲ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂﻗﻴﻢﺳﺮﻋﺔﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰﻟﺮﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺳﺮﻋﺔﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔﻓﺘﺤﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭOK : ﺑﻌﺪﺫﻟﻚ،ﳝﻜﻦﻟﺸﺨﺺﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻦﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭOK : ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭOK : ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ >ﻟﻴﻞ< ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭ'Oﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢﻋﺮﺽﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳋﻤﺲ ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭ'Oﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ >ﻟﻴﻞ< 2.8 1S ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﺒﻂﺳﺮﻋﺔﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔﻓﺘﺤﺔﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ. ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﳝﻜﻦﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﳝﻜﻦﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺓﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢﺑﻬﺎﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﻢﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻭﺿﻊﻣﻘﻄﻊﻓﻴﻠﻢﻋﻦﻃﺮﻳﻖﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻗﺮﺹﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡﻃﺎﳌﺎﺃﻥﻭﻗﺖﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡﻳﺴﻤﺢﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡﺇﺫﺍﰎﲢﺮﻳﺮﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍﺃﺭﺩﺕﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ،ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻣﺮﺓﹰﺃﺧﺮﻯ xﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻭﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ YYﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ *.+1&( "7 ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ '14'14ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﻣﻘﻄﻊﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢﺑﺪﻭﻥﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢﻟﻚﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖﻋﻦﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏﻓﻴﻬﺎﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻫﺬﻩﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔﳝﻜﻨﻚﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮﺍﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔﻟﺪﻳﻚﻓﻲﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢﺩﻭﻥﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔﺇﻟﻰﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﻣﻦﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺗﺎﻥ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻘﻄﻊﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﻳﺴﻤﺢﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡﺇﺫﺍﰎﲢﺮﻳﺮﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ،ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﳝﻜﻨﻚﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﻣﻘﻄﻊﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢﺑﺪﻭﻥﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ< ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺻﻮﺕ< ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺇﻏﻼﻕ< ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ xﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔﺑﻨﺎﺀﻋﻠﻰﻧﻮﻉﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪﺍﳌﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻭﺳﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﻋﻠﻰﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻗﺮﺹﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉﺍﳌﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺷﺎﺷﺔ-$% ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ >ﻣﺸﻬﺪﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ< ﻋﺪﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ >ﺃﺑﻴﺾ< ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ >ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺎﻟﻲ< ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ >ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ< ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ >ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ< ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ >ﺻﻮﺭﺓﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔﺫﺍﺕﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ< tﻓﻲﺣﺎﻟﺔﻋﺪﻡﺗﻌﺮﻑﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻋﻠﻰﻭﺿﻊﻣﻨﻈﺮﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ،ﻳﺘﻢﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ tﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲﺣﺎﻟﺔﻭﺟﻮﺩﻭﺟﻪ،ﻓﻤﻦﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦﺃﻻﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔﺑﻨﺎﺀﹰﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ tﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔﺇﻟﻰﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ tﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ>ﻟﻴﻞ<ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵﻋﻠﻰﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺗﺸﻐﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ>ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ<ﺑﻌﺪﻓﺤﺺﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ tﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞﺛﻼﺛﻲ،ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺔﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻭﺭﺍﺀﻩ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ >ﺻﻮﺭﺓﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ< ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ >ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ< ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ >ﻧﺺ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ< ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ >ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ< ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ >ﺣﺮﻛﺔ< ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﹰﺍ ﺃﻣﻮﺭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ tﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺼﻔﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺷﺤﻦﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺣﺘﻰﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎﻩﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ >ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ< tﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﲟﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻋﺎﻛﺴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺀ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻣﻌﺎ ﹰ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ،ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻓﻴﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﺼﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﺭﻳﺔﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ >ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ< tﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﺎ ﹰﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲﺀ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ %*4ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ، ﻭﻗﺪﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪﺑﺎﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ -$%ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰﺳﻄﺢﺛﺎﺑﺖﺃﻭﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺇﻟﻰﻭﺿﻊﺇﻃﻼﻕﺿﻮﺀﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ tﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀﻳﺮﺟﻰﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺻﻮﺭﺓﻣﻊﻭﺟﻮﺩﺃﺷﻌﺔﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲﻓﻲﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔﻓﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑﻓﻲﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻗﺪﻳﺠﻌﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔﹰﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓﻓﻲﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ،ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ>ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ<ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﻈﺮﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺃﻭﻓﻼﺵﺍﻟﻤﻞﺀ ﺍﻧﻈﺮﺻﻔﺤﺔﺃﻭﻗﻴﺎﺱﻧﻘﻄﺔﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ "$#ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ tﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ tﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﳝﻜﻦﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲﺣﺎﻟﺔﻋﺪﻡﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ،ﻳﻌﻤﻞﻫﺬﺍﺍﻟﺰﺭﻛﺰﺭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺃﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻋﻠﻰﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ 9 ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲﲟﻌﺪﻝ 9 ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﳌﻌﺪﻟﲔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﺇﺟﻤﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ 9 ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﻃﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺧﻼﻝﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖﺍﶈﺪﺩ،ﻓﺴﻮﻑﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅﻋﻠﻰﻋﻤﺮﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺭﺟﻊﺇﻟﻰﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﻓﻲﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ tﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺣﺘﻰﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰﺑﺪﺀﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﻣﻘﻄﻊﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻣﺮﺓﹰﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓﹰﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡﻟﻠﻤﺪﺓﺍﻟﺘﻲﺗﺴﻤﺢﺑﻬﺎﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ،ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻣﺮﺓﹰﺃﺧﺮﻯ tﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻳﺆﺩﻱﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻟﻨﺼﻔﻪ ﺇﻟﻰﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲﻭﻓﺤﺺﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺆﺩﻱﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻗﻤﺖﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ،ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞﺑﻌﺪﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻣﻦﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺗﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ & 5&-ﺗﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ 5ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ؛ ﲟﻌﻨﻰ ﺃﻧﻪﻳﺼﺒﺢﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ & 5&-ﺗﻴﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ،9ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ5ﺇﻟﻰﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﲢﺮﻳﺮﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲﻋﻠﻰﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﺭﻗﻤﻲ ،9ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ 5ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ5 ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ5 >ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ & 8*%ﻭﺍﺳﻊ< >ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ & 5&-ﺗﻴﻠﻲ< >ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ < 9 ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ & 8*%ﻭﺍﺳﻊﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻳﺆﺩﻱﺫﻟﻚﺇﻟﻰﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ، ﲟﻌﻨﻰ ﺃﻥﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﺍ ﹰﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ 8ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﻌﻤﻞﻋﻠﻰﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻋﻠﻰﺍﳊﺪﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ؛ ﲟﻌﻨﻰﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭﺃﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎﻳﻜﻮﻥﻋﻦﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ8 ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ8 >ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ & 5&-ﺗﻴﻠﻲ< >ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ & 8*%ﻭﺍﺳﻊ< >ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ < 9 ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ & 8*%ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴﹰﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻳﺆﺩﻱﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﺇﻟﻰﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲﺛﻢ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥﻳﺘﻢﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ8 >ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ < 9 ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻣﻦﻣﻌﺎﳉﺘﻬﺎﻟﺬﺍ،ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡﻟﺘﺘﻢﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔﺍﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ،ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﺑﺼﺮﻱﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ5ﻣﺮﺓﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﳝﻜﻦﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﻓﻲﺑﻌﺾﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ >ﻟﻴﻞ<>،ﺻﻮﺭﺓﺷﺨﺺ<> ،ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ<، >ﻧﺺ<> ،ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ<> ،ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ< ﻭﻭﺿﻊ %*4ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ >ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ<> ،ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ<، >ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ< ﻭ>ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ< ﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﳌﺲ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﲤﺔ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺛﻢﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎﻣﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﳊﺬﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ،ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔﻗﺎﲤﺔﻭﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﺣﺬﺭ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ8 >ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ & 5&-ﺗﻴﻠﻲ< >ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ & 8*%ﻭﺍﺳﻊ< ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ) / (DISPﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ) ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺃﻋﻠﻰﻛﺰﺭﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻓﻲﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞﺃﻭﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﻫﺬﺍﺍﻟﺰﺭﺇﻟﻰﻋﺮﺽﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺃﺳﻔﻞﻛﺰﺭﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﻓﻲﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﲟﺪﻯﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭﺣﺘﻰﻳﻈﻬﺮﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔﻣﺆﺷﺮﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻳﻌﺮﺽﻛﻞﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ >ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ< ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ >ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ< >ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ< >ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ >ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ < < ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ) ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ 8ﻭﺍﺳﻊ5،ﺗﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻮﻉﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺪﻯﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺪﻯﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ o 8ﻣﻦ _ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ 5ﻣﻦ _ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ o ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ o o o o o ﻣﻨﻈﺮ o o ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ _ _ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ o o 8ﻣﻦ _ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ 5ﻣﻦ _ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻮﻉﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺳﻢ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔﻣﻦﺧﻼﻝﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ Pﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ، ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ 8ﻣﻦ_ﻣﺎﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ 5ﻣﻦ _ﻣﺎﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ o o ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻮﻉﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺪﻯﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ %*4 ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ 8ﻣﻦ _ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ 5ﻣﻦ _ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ o o ﻋﺎﺩﻱ o 8ﻣﻦ _ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ 5ﻣﻦ _ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ o o tﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ،ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ tﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺗﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻭﺿﻊﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭﻗﻢﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻭﺿﻊﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ o o o o ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ) ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦﻏﻴﺮﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻗﻔﻞﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔﻳﺆﺩﻱﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻞﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻳﻌﻤﻞﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺼﻔﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻓﻬﺬﺍﻳﻌﻨﻲﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻗﺪﺭﻛﺰﺕﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩﺗﻮﺥﺍﳊﺬﺭﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎﻩﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﲡﻨﺒﺎ ﹰﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺻﻮﺭﻏﻴﺮﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺼﻔﻪ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞﺍﻟﺬﻱﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩﺛﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎﻩﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺇﺫﺍﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚﻣﻦ ﻓﻮﻕﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺳﻴﺘﻢﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔﻗﻔﻞﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ >ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ< ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ >ﻓﻴﻠﻢ< ﻭﻭﺿﻊ > <%*4ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢﺍﻟﺬﻱﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐﻣﻊﺑﻴﺌﺔﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺇﻟﻰﻧﺼﻔﻪﻭﺭﻛﺰﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻡ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ *40 ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ &8*% ﺗﻴﻠﻲ &5&- ﻭﺍﺳﻊ &8*% ﺗﻴﻠﻲ &5&- ﻭﺍﺳﻊ &8*% ﺗﻴﻠﻲ &5&- _ _ _ _ _ _ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ) ﻳﺴﺎﺭ tﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻻ ﹸﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ tﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ tﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻫﻮ ﺛﻮﺍ ﹴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵﻣﺪﺓﹰﺃﻃﻮﻝ tﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،%*4ﻟﻦﺗﻌﻤﻞﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﻓﻼﺵﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﻣﻘﻄﻊﻓﻴﻠﻢﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ>ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ<ﻭ>ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ<ﻭ>ﻧﺺ<ﻭ>ﻏﺮﻭﺏ<ﻭ>ﻓﺠﺮ<ﻭ>ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ< tﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ tﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻛﺴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺀ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ tﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺗﻬﺎ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ،ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻂﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀﻓﻲﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔﺗﺤﺪﺙﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﺔﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺿﻮﺀﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵﻟﻠﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻱ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩﺃﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺘﻪﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﻓﻼﺵﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩﺃﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺘﻪﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﻓﻼﺵﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰﻭﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﻞﺀ ﻳﺘﻢﺇﻃﻼﻕﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵﺑﻐﺾﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻋﻦﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺳﻴﺘﻢﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎﻟﻜﻞﺗﻼﺋﻢﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻳﺘﻢﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﳌﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻓﻲﻇﺮﻭﻑﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ،ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮﻣﺆﺷﺮﲢﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ %ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑﺻﻮﺭﺓiﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻤﺮﺍﺀ،wﻳﻘﻮﻡﻫﺬﺍﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﻢﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﻋﻨﺪﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻓﻲ ﺃﻱﻣﻦﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲﻳﺤﻈﺮﻓﻴﻬﺎﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺻﻮﺭﺓﻓﻲﻇﺮﻭﻑﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮﻣﺆﺷﺮﲢﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ %ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ) ﺯﺭ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ) ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡﻋﻠﻰﺣﺴﺐﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ Pﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P o P ﳝﲔ ﻋﻨﺪﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔﻳﺆﺩﻱﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﳝﲔﺇﻟﻰﲢﻮﻳﻞﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺇﻟﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺯﺭ ﳝﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﻳﺮﻳﺪﺍﳌﺼﻮﺭﻧﻔﺴﻪﺃﻥﻳﻈﻬﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻟﺘﻲﻳﺘﻢﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ P o P ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ o P P P o o P P P P P P P P P P P P P tﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ >ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ< tﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﺆﻗﺖﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ tﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞﺛﻼﺛﻲﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢﳌﻨﻊﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﻓﻲﻭﺿﻊﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ،ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞﻣﺆﻗﺖﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﳌﻀﺒﻮﻁﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ) ﳝﲔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﳝﲔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏﻋﻠﻰﺷﺎﺷﺔ -$%ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔﻋﻠﻰﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺑﻌﺪﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲﺍﶈﺪﺩ >ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺗﻲ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ< ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻓﺎﺻﻞﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑﺣﺮﻛﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻓﺎﺻﻞﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻢﻳﺘﻢﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺷﻐﻞﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﻌﺪﻣﺮﻭﺭﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﲔ ﻳﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻨﻲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺆﻗﺖﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ،ﺑﺪﺀﺍﻻﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺭﺟﺢﻳﺪﻳﻚﲤﺎﻣﹰﺎ ،ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻻﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺎﺻﻞﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻗﺪﺭﻩﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺘﻢﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻴﺢﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲﻗﺪﺭﻩ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺆﻗﺖﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺻﻮﺭﺓﺑﻌﺪﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺛﻮﺍﻥﹴ ،ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺖﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻭﻓﻲﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ،ﻗﺪﻳﺘﺄﺧﺮﻣﺆﻗﺖﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺆﻗﺖﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﻮﺍ ﹴﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ،ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺧﻼﻝﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺣﺮﻙ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺴﻤﻚ ﲤﺎﻣﹰﺎ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﳌﺒﺔﺑﻴﺎﻥﻣﺆﻗﺖﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲﻭﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩﺑﻌﺪﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ،ﻭﻳﺘﻢﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﻋﻨﺪﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ،ﺭﲟﺎ ﻟﻦﻳﻌﻤﻞﻣﺆﻗﺖﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ tﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻡ tﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ tﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ tﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔﻏﻴﺮﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ tﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮﺣﻴﺚﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑﻋﻠﻰﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ tﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢﺗﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮﺍﻟﺜﺒﺎﺕﺑﻌﺪﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ) ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍﺍﻟﺰﺭﻣﺮﺓﹰﺃﺧﺮﻯﺇﻟﻰﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﲢﺪﻳﺪﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲﲤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﻭﺯﺭ'Oﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ >ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ< ﺻﻮﺕ >ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ< ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ >ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ <0, ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ "$# ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ *40 ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ >ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ< ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔﺃﻭﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ &7 ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ( ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﻧﻤﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ( ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ) ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡﺯﺭ 'Oﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲤﻜﲔﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺯﺭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ .&/6ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ< ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖﳝﲔ &7 ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ &7 ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ *40 *40 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰﺑﻀﺒﻂﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊﺃﻳﻀﺎﲢﺪﻳﺪﻗﻴﻤﺔﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ><&7 ﹰ ﺯﺭﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖﳝﲔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ "$# "$# ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ &7 &7 ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ *40 *40 ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺯﺭﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ "$# ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ > <&7 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭﻱ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﳝﲔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 0,ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢﺇﻏﻼﻕﻭﺿﻊﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺇﺫﺍﻗﻤﺖﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽﻣﺆﺷﺮﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻋﻠﻰﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ &7 ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓﻟﻀﺒﻂﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ "$# ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎﻟﻨﻮﻉﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ xﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻻﺣﻆﺃﻥﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻗﻴﻤﺔﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔﺗﺆﺩﻱﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾﻭﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀﻭﻗﺪﻻﲢﺼﻞﻋﻠﻰﺻﻮﺭﺓﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﻼﺋﻢﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲﻓﻲﻳﻮﻡﺭﺍﺋﻖ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭﳝﲔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ( ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ) ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻗﺪﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎ ﹰﻃﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﹰﺑﻨﺎ ﹰﺀ ﻋﻠﻰﺑﻴﺌﺔﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﳝﻜﻨﻚﲢﺪﻳﺪﺃﻛﺜﺮﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﺗﺴﻤﺢﻟﻚﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢﻓﻲﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔﺑﺸﻜﻞﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎﻟﻨﻮﻉﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻡﺃﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺗﻘﻮﻡﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ،ﺑﻨﺎﺀﹰﻋﻠﻰﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻓﻲﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻓﻲﻇﻞ ﺗﻠﺒﺪﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻴﻮﻡ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻴﻨﺖ ) ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉﺿﻮﺀﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖﻧﻬﺎﺭﺍ ﹰﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻣﻦﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺜﻼﺛﺔﻃﺮﻕ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻴﻨﺖ - ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻓﻲﻇﻞﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﲔ ﺿﺒﻂﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻓﻲﻇﻞﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓﺍﻟﺘﻨﺠﺴﺘﲔ ﳌﺒﺎﺕﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻴﺢﻫﺬﺍﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ xﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﳌﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔﻣﻦﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺣﺘﻰ ﻻﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔﺳﻮﻯﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﺴﺒ ﹰﻘﹶﺎﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻝ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺭﻗﺔﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺪ ﹰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲﺗﻘﻮﻡﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ) ( *40 ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﳝﻜﻦﲢﺪﻳﺪﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ *40ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ *40 >ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ<ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰﺑﻨﺎ ﹰﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺃﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ *40 ﺿﺒﻂﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ >< *40 ﳝﻜﻦﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓﺳﺮﻋﺔﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀﻭﺟﻮﺩﻧﻔﺲﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ، ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻦﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ *40 ﻭﻣﻊﺫﻟﻚ،ﻓﻘﺪﺗﺘﺸﺒﻊﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﻓﻲﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،*40ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻟﻠﻀﻮﺀﻭﻣﻦﺛﻢﺯﺍﺩﺕﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑﺍﳌﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ،ﺳﻴﺰﻳﺪﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶﻓﻲﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،*40ﻟﺘﺠﻌﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮﺳﻮﺀﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ[ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ISOﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﻜﲔ ] [ISOﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[. ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ :ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ،%*4 ،ﺩﻟﻴﻞﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ،ﻟﻘﻄﺔﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ،ﺻﻮﺭﺓﺷﺨﺺ، ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ،ﺷﺎﻃﺊ ﻭﺛﻠﺞ ﰎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮﻋﻨﺪﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﻛﻤﻠﻪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻲﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ،ﻓﻌﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑﻭﺟﻪﺇﻧﺴﺎﻥﻋﻨﺪﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺇﻧﺴﺎﻥ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞﺩﺭﺟﺔﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪﻛﻤﺎﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﹰ ﻭﺟﻪﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﺿﺒﻂﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑﻭﺟﻪﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ) ( tﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ tﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﺳﺘﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺷﺨﺺ tﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ tﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑﻭﻳﺘﻢﻋﺮﺽﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱﻋﻠﻰﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪﻭﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾﺇﻟﻰﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ tﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻲﺑﻌﺾﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ،ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺑﺸﻜﻞﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺗﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ tﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ tﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ،ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ tﻓﻲﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ>ﻟﻘﻄﺔﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ< ﻭ>ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺺ< ﻭ>ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ< ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ<ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻚ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ،ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ xﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ،%*4 ،ﺩﻟﻴﻞﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ،ﻟﻘﻄﺔﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ، ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺺ ،ﺷﺎﻃﺊ ﻭﺛﻠﺞ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﲡﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ، ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﺍﻉ tﺍﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕﺃﺳﺮﻉﻻﻳﺸﺒﻪﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﻻﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪﻓﻲﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ tﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ) ( ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺿﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ،ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﺒﺘﺴﻤﹰﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺘﺴﻢ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﺘﻴﺢﻟﻚﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢﻓﻲﻟﻮﻥﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻟﺘﻲﻳﺘﻢﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎﻓﻲﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺔﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯﺍﶈﺪﺩﺃﻋﻠﻰ،ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﻮﻉﻟﻮﻥﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺣﺪﺩ >ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ< ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺿﺒﻂﺩﺭﺟﺔﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﭼﺸﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻡ ﯾﮑﻨﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﺘﻴﺢﻟﻚﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺟﻌﻞﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻧﻘﻴﺔﻭﺟﻤﻴﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞﻓﻲﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺔﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔﻟﻜﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯﺍﶈﺪﺩﺃﻋﻠﻰ ،ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩﺕﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ tﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪﺍﻟﻤﺒﺘﺴﻢﺃﻭﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﻀﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲﺣﺎﻟﺔﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱﻣﻦﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﹰ ﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ >ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ< ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺿﺒﻂﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ( ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ) ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳝﻜﻨﻚﲢﺪﻳﺪﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﲟﺎﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐﻣﻊﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ QJYFM ﻭﺿﻊﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ Y Y Y 9 9 9 9 ﻭﺿﻊﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ Y ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺣﺠﻢﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺠﻢﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ > ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ < Y ﺣﺠﻢﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺣﺠﻢﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻭﺿﻊﺻﻮﺭﺓﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺿﻊﻣﻘﻄﻊﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔﺟﺪﹰﺍ ﻣﻠﻒﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ +QFH ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ +QFH ﺿﺒﻂﺟﻮﺩﺓﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ '14 +QFH '14 BWJ BWJ ﻣﻌﺪﻝﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕﻟﻜﻞﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ >ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ< tﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺾ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚﲢﺪﻳﺪﻣﻌﺪﻝﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﲟﺎﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐﻣﻊﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖﺍﳋﺎﺹﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩﻣﻌﺪﻝﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ، ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ > ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ < ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ >ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ< tﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ '%$ +PJOU1IPUPHSBQIJD&YQFSUT(SPVQ t (&+1ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻭﺿﻌﺘﻪ +PJOU1IPUPHSBQIJD&YQFSUT(SPVQ ﻭﻫﺬﺍﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉﻣﻦﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻫﻮﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﹰﻟﻀﻐﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻭﺭﺳﻮﻡﺍﻟﺠﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﺲﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﹰﻷﻧﻪﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﻐﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺑﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ) ( ACB اﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮر ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ذات اﺧﺘﻼف ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ، أي إﺿﺎءة ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ أو ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ .ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﻮع ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ وﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ اﻟﻬﺪف ﺑﻮﺿﻮح. إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ اﳊﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮوف ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮر أﻛﺜﺮ وﺿﻮﺣﺎ ً. ( ]ﻣﺘﻌﺪد[ ) -اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟـ ]] :[ACBإﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ[] ،ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻳﻌﻮض ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎدي ﻋﻦ اﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎت ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﻮع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ACB ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ رﺟﻮع ]ﻣﺮﻛﺰ[ ) ( :ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻘﻴﺎس ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ اﻟﻀﻮء اﳌﺘﺎح ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮرة. وﻣﻊ ذﻟﻚ ،ﺳﻴﻨﺤﺮف اﻟﻘﻴﺎس ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮرة.وﻳﺼﻠﺢ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪاماﻟﻌﺎم. :ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺒﻠﻮرﻳﺔ .وﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎ ً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎً ،ﺑﻐﺾ اﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ اﻹﺿﺎءة اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ. ]اﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺳﻂ[ ) Äإﺗﻜﻮن وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ACBﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ أو ]ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ[ أو ]ﺻﻮرة ﺷﺨﺺ[ .ﺗﻌﻤﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ACBداﺋﻤًﺎ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[] ،ﺻﻮرة ﺷﺨﺺ[. اﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ إﻋﺪاد ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺴﻄﻮع. ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ رﺟﻮع ( :ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻘﻴﺎس ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ اﻟﻀﻮء اﳌﺘﺎح ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮرة .وﻣﻊ ذﻟﻚ ،ﺳﻴﻨﺤﺮف اﻟﻘﻴﺎس ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮرة. وﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ذﻟﻚ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮر اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮة ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺰﻫﻮر أو اﳊﺸﺮات. Äإذا ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮه ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ اﻟﺒﺆري ،ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم وﺿﻊ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ذﻟﻚ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ. وﻳﻔﻀﻞ ،ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬه اﳊﺎﻟﺔ ،اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ. 043 ( ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ) ﻭﺿﻊﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻧﻮﻉﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮﻭ "&#ﻛﺘﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﳝﻜﻦﲢﺪﻳﺪﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺍﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺣﺴﺐﻇﺮﻭﻑﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ >ﻓﺮﺩﻱ< ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺑﺸﻜﻞﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢﲢﺮﻳﺮﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ >ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ< >ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ< >'"ﻣﺮﻛﺰ< ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻧﻮﻉﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞﻣﻊﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺑﻌﺪﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ،ﻳﺘﻢﺣﻔﻆﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻣﻊﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔﺃﻗﺼﻰﻋﺪﺩﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕﻫﻮﻭﺣﺠﻢﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖﻛﺄﻧﻪ"(7 ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ > <"&# ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂﺛﻼﺙﺻﻮﺭﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔﻓﻲﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥﻣﻦﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐﲢﺪﻳﺪﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ tﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺪﺓﻭﺿﻊﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ tﻳﺘﻢﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ>ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ<>،ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ<،<"&#> ،ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ tﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ "&# tﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ tﻣﻦﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺣﺎﻣﻞﺛﻼﺛﻲﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ "&#ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝﻭﻗﺪﻳﺤﺪﺙﺗﺸﻮﺵﻧﺎﰋ ﻋﻦﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ >'"ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ< ﺳﻴﺘﻢﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲﻣﻦﻧﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲﺍﻟﺘﺴﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ xﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ،ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮﻟﻮﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲﺇﻟﻰﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﻻﺗﺮﻛﺰﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ،ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮﻟﻮﻥﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲﺇﻟﻰﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ( ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ) ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﺼﺺ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 3ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭ ( ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ #ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﳕﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﻥﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﻧﻤﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﺒﻂﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻋﻠﻰﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ 3ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻭ( ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻭ #ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ 0, ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﻊﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﺣﻴﻮﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻏﺎﺑﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺭﺍﺋﻊ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺭﺍﺋﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﺉ ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ tﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﳕﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ،ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ tﻋﻨﺪﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﳕﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰﺭﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ ،ﻻﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮﻣﻴﺰﺓﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ tﻋﻨﺪﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﳕﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻋﻠﻰﺳﻠﺒﻲ،ﻻﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮﻣﻴﺰﺓﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻫﺎﺩﺉ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺠﺎﺗﻴﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ 3(# ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ 3(#ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ) ( ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. ﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .1ﺣﺪﺩ ]ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ[ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ/ﺃﺳﻔﻞ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ/ﳝﲔ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. .1ﺣﺪﺩ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ[ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ/ﺃﺳﻔﻞ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ/ﳝﲔ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ. ﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦﻭﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ. ﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ • ﻋﻨﺪﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﳕﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻋﻠﻰﺳﻠﺒﻲ،ﻻﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮﻣﻴﺰﺓﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ. ﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦﻭﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ. ﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ .1ﺣﺪﺩ ]ﺍﳊﺪﺓ[ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ/ﺃﺳﻔﻞ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﳊﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ/ﳝﲔ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ. 046 ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳊﺪﺓ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺷﻚ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ. ﻻﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖﻣﻦﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﳊﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ،ﻷﻥﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﻻﻳﺘﻢﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔﻓﻲﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦﻭﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ. ﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ • ﻋﻨﺪﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﳕﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰﺭﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ ،ﻻﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮﻣﻴﺰﺓﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ. ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ) ( ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺛﻮﺍﻥﹴ ﳝﻜﻦﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﻃﺎﳌﺎﺗﺴﻤﺢﺑﺬﻟﻚﺍﳌﺪﺓﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻣﻴﺰﺓﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﺮﺓﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﺫﺍﰎﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ، ﻓﻬﺬﺍﻳﻌﻨﻲﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪﰎﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀﻣﻦﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮ ﹰﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﹰﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﻷﻃﻮﻝﻭﻗﺖ ﳑﻜﻦﻃﺎﳌﺎﺗﺴﻤﺢﺑﺬﻟﻚﺍﳌﺪﺓﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﺪﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺘﻢﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞﻋﻠﻰﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﺇﺫﺍﰎ ﲢﺮﻳﺮﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ،ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ XBW ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﻓﻲﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﳌﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﳊﻈﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﻳﺆﺩﻱﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺇﻟﻰﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ >ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ< ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ) ( ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ،ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﺍﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﺩﻭﻥﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔﺇﻟﻰﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﻣﻘﻄﻊﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢﺑﺪﻭﻥﺻﻮﺕ ﳝﻜﻨﻚﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢﺑﺪﻭﻥﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ >ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ< ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ،ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ tﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﻨﻚ ﻭﺑﲔ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺪﺩ >ﺇﻏﻼﻕ<ﳋﻴﺎﺭ >ﺻﻮﺕ<ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕﻟﻠﻤﺪﺓﺍﻟﺘﻲﺗﺴﻤﺢﺑﻬﺎﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮﺑﺪﻭﻥﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺻﻮﺕﺍﳌﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻓﻲﻛﻞﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ xﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﳝﻜﻨﻚﲢﺪﻳﺪﺻﻮﺕﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ>ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ<<> ،<> ،<> ، ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )Í ١ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ١ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ'" ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊﲢﺪﻳﺪﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯﺻﻮﺕﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﺻﻮﺕﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻭﻧﻐﻤﺔﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪﻭﺻﻮﺕ '" ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ>ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ<>ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ<، >ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ<، >ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ<، >ﻋﺎﻟﻲ< ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ١ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ١ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ'" ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺇﺫﺍﻗﻤﺖﺑﻀﺒﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﻋﻠﻰ ،0/ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭﺇﻧﺬﺍﺭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ،ﳑﺎﻳﺘﻴﺢﻟﻚﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ >ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ<>ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ<<> ،<> ،<> ، ﺻﻮﺕﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﳝﻜﻨﻚﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪﻋﻨﺪﺑﺪﺀﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ>ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ<<> ،<> ،<> ، ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ١ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ'" ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ١ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ١ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ'" ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ١ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )Í ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺕ '" ﳝﻜﱢ ﻨﻚ ﻫﺬﺍﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻦﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻓﻲﻛﻞﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ xﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺇﺫﺍﻗﻤﺖﺑﻀﺒﻂﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲﻋﻠﻰﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺻﻮﺕﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﻋﻨﺪﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺣﺘﻰﺍﳌﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺣﺘﻰﳝﻜﻨﻚﺃﻥﺗﻜﻮﻥﻋﻠﻰﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ >ﺻﻮﺕ '"<>ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ<، >ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ< ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ١ ١ ﺻﻮﺕ'" ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ) ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮﻋﻠﻰﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔﻋﺪﺓﻟﻐﺎﺕﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢﺣﻔﻆﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔﺛﻢﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎﻣﺮﺓﹰﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ -BOHVBHF Dansk &OHMJTI Svenskaﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ Suomi ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ไทย ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ Bahasa ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ٠٫٥ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮ ﺑﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻳﺤﺪﺙﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﺍﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﳌﻮﻗﻊﻭﺟﻪﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺻﻮﺭﺓﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ< ﻭ >ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ< ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ١ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ١ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ'" ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺻﻒﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊﲢﺪﻳﺪﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽﻭﺻﻒﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﻓﻲﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ >ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ< ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ >ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ< ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮ ﺑﻲ -BOHVBHF ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ 0.5ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ اﻟﻌﺮض ) ( ﺻﻮرة اﻟﺒﺪء وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺮض ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ أوﻻ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺒﻠﻮرﻳﺔ وﻗﺘﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا. إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﲔ ﻋﺮض ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺒﻠﻮرﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺪة اﶈﺪدة ﻓﻲ اﻹﻋﺪاد ]ﻋﺮض ﺳﺮﻳﻊ[. ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ. اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[*] ،ﺷﻌﺎر[] ،ﺻﻮرة اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم[ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺼﻮرة اﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻜﻮن ﺻﻮرة ﺑﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ]ﺻﻮرة ﺑﺪء[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﳊﺠﻢ[ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬف ﺻﻮرة اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺣﺬف[ أو ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[. ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬف ﺻﻮر اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ]إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ[. ﻋﺮ ﺑﻲ Language : ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ :وﺻﻒ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺻﻮرة اﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ٠٫٥ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ OFFﺳﻄﻮع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ : :ﻋﺮض ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ : رﺟﻮع ﺧﺮوج اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ]إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ :ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ. ] 0.5ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[* 1] ،ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ 3] ،ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ اﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜ ٍﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺰ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﶈﺪد. ﻋﺮ ﺑﻲ Language : ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ :وﺻﻒ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺻﻮرة اﻟﺒﺪء إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻄﻮع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ : ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ 0.5٠٫٥ إﻳﻘﺎفﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ 1 اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ :ﻋﺮض ﺳﺮﻳﻊ 3ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮعاﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪى ﺳﻄﻮع ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺒﻠﻮرﻳﺔ. -اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[* ]ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ[ ]ﻋﺎدﻳﺔ[ ]ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ[ رﺟﻮع إذا ﺿﺒﻄﺖ ] ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﶈﺪد ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺒﻠﻮرﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ. ﻋﺮ ﺑﻲ: Language ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ: وﺻﻒ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺻﻮرة اﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ: ﺳﻄﻮع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ٠٫٥ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ: إﻳﻘﺎفﻋﺎدﻳﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻋﺮض ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ رﺟﻮع اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ]إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[* :ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ إﻃﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺒﻠﻮرﻳﺔ. :ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﺧﻼل وﻗﺖ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻣﻌﲔ )ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ 30ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ،ﺗﺘﺤﻮل ﻃﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ إﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺴﻜﻮن )ﳌﺒﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا:ﺗﻮﻣﺾ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ. ﻋﺮ ﺑﻲ Language : ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ :وﺻﻒ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺻﻮرة اﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ :ﺳﻄﻮع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ :ﻋﺮض ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ٠٫٥ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ رﺟﻮع Äﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ رؤﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ[ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. 051 اﻹﻋﺪادات )”( ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔاﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﺳﺘﻌﺎدة اﻹﻋﺪادات اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬف ﻛﻞ اﻟﺼﻮر ﲟﺎ ﻓﻲ ذﻟﻚ اﻟﺼﻮر اﶈﻤﻴﺔ .ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة. ﺳﺘﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﺎدة ﻛﺎﻓﺔ إﻋﺪادات ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا ووﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ. وﻣﻊ ذﻟﻚ ،ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ/اﻟﻮﻗﺖ واﻟﻠﻐﺔ وﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ]ﻧﻌﻢ[ :ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ .ﺣﺪد اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ]ﻧﻌﻢ[. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[ وﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة .إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻣﺮ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا، ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﲤﺖ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ[. ]ﻻ[* :ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة. ﻧﻌﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻻ : 2009/01/01ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ/وﻗﺖ ﻟﻨﺪن :اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ :رﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ 3دﻗﺎﺋﻖ :اﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ رﺟﻮع ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻣﺮ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻧﻮاع اﻵﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة. ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ذاﻛﺮة ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ،أو ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ذاﻛﺮة ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ذاﻛﺮة ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا أن ﺗﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﻠﻴﻪ أو ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ذاﻛﺮة ﻣﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا أﺧﺮى. ﻗﻢ دوﻣﺎ ً ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا .إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ذاﻛﺮة ﲤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮات أﺧﺮى أو ﻗﺎرﺋﺎت ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة أو اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ[. 052 إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻌﻢ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ/وﻗﺖ ﻻ :اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺪن ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ :رﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ 3دﻗﺎﺋﻖ :اﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ]ﻧﻌﻢ[ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض إﻃﺎر ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ. ﺣﺪد اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[ وﺳﺘﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﺎدة ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻹﻋﺪادات إﻟﻰ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ. ]ﻻ[* :ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﺎدة اﻹﻋﺪادات إﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ. ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ رﺟﻮع اﻹﻋﺪادات )”( اﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ /اﻟﻮﻗﺖ /ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺬي ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳌﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ وﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ .ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ[ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﶈﻠﻴﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺒﻠﻮرﻳﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﳋﺎرج. ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺑﺄن ﻳﺤﺪد ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ. ]إﻋﺎدة اﻟﻀﺒﻂ[ :ﺑﻌﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ إﻋﺎدة اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ :ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ/وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ أو ﺣﺬف ﻛﻞ أو إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ذاﻛﺮة :اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺪن ﺟﺪﻳﺪة. :رﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ إﻋﺎدة اﻟﻀﺒﻂ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ]ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ[* :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳉﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﺎﻷرﻗﺎم ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ :اﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ دﻗﻴﻘﺔ 3 اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ أرﻗﺎم اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﻘﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ رﺟﻮع ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ذاﻛﺮة ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ،أو ﺑﻌﺪ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ،أو ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬف ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺼﻮر اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ. ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ 2009/01/01 ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ] :ﺳﻨﺔ/ﺷﻬﺮ/ﻳﻮم[] ،ﺷﻬﺮ/ﻳﻮم/ﺳﻨﺔ[،]ﻳﻮم/ﺷﻬﺮ/ﺳﻨﺔ[] ،إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ[* ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ : 2009/01/01ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ/وﻗﺖ ﻟﻨﺪن yyyy mm dd :اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ 2009 / 01 / 01 ﺳﻨﺔ/ﺷﻬﺮ/ﻳﻮم :رﻗﻢ13:00 ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ 3دﻗﺎﺋﻖ :اﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺮوج رﺟﻮع واﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ اﻷول ﻫﻮ اﺳﻢ اﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ اﺨﻤﻟﺰن اﻷول ﻫﻮﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ أﺳﻤﺎء اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻦ SDC10001 .SDC19999 ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ اﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪات ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻮاﻟﻲ ﺑﺪء ﻣﻦ وﺣﺘﻰ وذﻟﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ:. ~ . اﳊﺪ اﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻷرﻗﺎم اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻫﻮ)ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖاﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا( .إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮرة. .SDC10001 SDC10002 اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔاﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ اﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲﻟﻨﺪن ،ﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻴﺮد ،ووﺳﻂ اﶈﻴﻂ اﻻﻃﻠﺴﻲ ،ﺑﻮﻳﻨﺲ اﻳﺮس، ﻧﻴﻮﻓﺎوﻧﺪﻻﻧﺪ ،ﻛﺮاﻛﺎس ،ﺳﻮﻧﻐﺴﲔ ،ﻣﻴﺎﻣﻲ ،ﻧﻴﻮﻳﻮرك ،ﺷﻴﻜﺎﻏﻮ، داﻻس ،دﻧﻔﺮ ،ﻓﻴﻨﻴﻜﺲ ،ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﻮس اﳒﻠﻮس ،ﺳﺎن ﻓﺮاﻧﺴﻴﺴﻜﻮ، أﻻﺳﻜﺎ ،ﻫﻮﻧﻮﻟﻮﻟﻮ ،ﻫﺎواي ،ﺳﺎﻣﻮا ،ﻣﻴﺪواي ،وﻳﻠﻨﺠﺘﻮن ،اوﻛﻼﻧﺪ، اوﺧﻮﺗﺴﻚ ،ﻏﻮام ،ﺳﻴﺪﻧﻲ ،داروﻳﻦ ،ادﻳﻠﻴﺪ ،ﺳﻮل ،ﻃﻮﻛﻴﻮ ،ﺑﻜﲔ، ﻫﻮﻧﻎ ﻛﻮﻧﻎ ،ﺑﺎﻧﻜﻮك ،ﺟﺎﻛﺮﺗﺎ ،ﻳﺎﳒﻮن ،اﳌﺎﺗﻲ ،ﻛﺎﲤﺎﻧﺪو ،ﻣﻮﻣﺒﺎي، ﻧﻴﻮدﻟﻬﻲ ،ﻃﺸﻘﻨﺪ ،ﻛﺎﺑﻮل ،أﺑﻮ ﻇﺒﻲ ،ﻃﻬﺮان ،ﻣﻮﺳﻜﻮ ،أﺛﻴﻨﺎ. اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ 01:00 PM 2009/01/01 DST ~ London ][GMT +00:00 رﺟﻮع : DST Äاﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ اﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ 053 اﻹﻋﺪادات )”( ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻮق اﻟﺼﻮرة إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ً ﳝﻜﻨﻚ أن ﺗﻄﺒﻊ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ/اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ. ﺗﻘﻮم ﻫﺬه اﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮة ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ً وذﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎظ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ. اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ]إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ * :ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ /اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة. :ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ اﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ]اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة. :ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ووﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ]ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ووﻗﺖ[ اﻟﺼﻮرة. ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ : 2009/01/01ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ/وﻗﺖ :اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺪن: إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :رﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ: اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ووﻗﺖ :اﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ دﻗﻴﻘﺔ :3 ﺿﺒﻂ رﺟﻮع Äﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ/اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ أﺳﻔﻞ اﳉﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ. Äﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ. Äﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ اﳌﻄﺒﻮع ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ وذﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ اﳌﺼﻨﻌﺔ ووﺿﻊ اﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ. 054 اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ]إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ :ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. ] 1دﻗﺎﺋﻖ[ 3] ،دﻗﺎﺋﻖ[* 5] ،دﻗﺎﺋﻖ[ 10] ،دﻗﺎﺋﻖ[ : ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ً إذا ﻣﺮت ﺗﻠﻚ اﳌﺪة ﺑﺪون ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا. ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ/وﻗﺖ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻨﺪن دﻗﻴﻘﺔ :اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ 1 ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ دﻗﻴﻘﺔ 3 :رﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ إﻳﻘﺎفدﻗﻴﻘﺔ 5 اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ 10 دﻗﻴﻘﺔ :اﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ دﻗﻴﻘﺔ 3 ﺿﺒﻂ رﺟﻮع ﺑﻌﺪ اﺳﺘﺒﺪال اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ إﻋﺪادات إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﻻﺣﻆ أن ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ً ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ/اﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ،أو ﻋﺮض ﺷﺮاﺋﺢ ،أو ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮت ،أو ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )Ä ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻧﻮﻉﻣﺨﺮﺝﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ /54$ﺃﻭ 1"- ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙﻟﻠﻤﺨﺮﺝﻋﻠﻰﻧﻮﻉﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ،ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰﺫﻟﻚﺍﻟﺬﻱﺳﻴﺘﻢﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﻪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ 1"-ﺑﺪﻋﻢ *)(#%ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ،ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ /54$ /54$ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ 1"- ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ '"ﻟﻤﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ 64# ﺿﺒﻂ /54$ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ،ﻛﻨﺪﺍ ،ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ،ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﳉﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ ،ﺍﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ 1"-ﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ ،ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ ،ﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜﺎ ،ﺍﻟﺼﲔ ،ﺍﻟﺪﳕﺎﺭﻙ ،ﻓﻨﻠﻨﺪﺍ ،ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ ،ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ،ﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ ،ﺇﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ، ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ ،ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ ،ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪﺍ،ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ،ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ،ﺳﻮﻳﺴﺮﺍ ،ﺗﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪ،ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ،ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ "7 ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ،ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ،ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﻲﻧﻔﺲﺗﻠﻚﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔﻋﻠﻰﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾoﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )Ä ﺿﻮﺀﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺿﺒﻂﻣﻨﻔﺬ 64# ﳝﻜﻨﻚﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﳌﺒﺔﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲﺣﺎﻟﺔﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﺃﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ،64#ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ>ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ<ﺃﻭ>ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ<ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ >ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ<ﻟﻦ ﻳﻀﺊ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ '"ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ '"ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ >ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ< ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ /54$ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ '"ﻟﻤﺒﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ 64# ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ><64# >ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ< ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ 64# >ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ<ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑﻋﻠﻰﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲﺍﳌﺘﺼﻞﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ >ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ<ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑﻋﻠﻰﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲﺍﳌﺘﺼﻞﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ /54$ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ '"ﻟﻤﺒﺔ 64# ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻢﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻭﻗﻢﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻭﺿﻊﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ( ﻳﻤﻜﻦﺍﻵﻥﺃﻥﺗﻘﻮﻡﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔﻓﻲﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﻓﻲﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ،ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖﻛﺎﻓﺔﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻋﻠﻰﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢﻳﺘﻢﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ،ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖﻛﺎﻓﺔﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﳕﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﳕﻂ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﻷﻛﺜﺮﻣﻦﺛﻮﺍﻥﻓﻲﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊﳕﻂ،ﻟﻦﻳﺘﻢﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺪﺀﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﻭﺻﻮﺕﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀﻭﺿﻊﳕﻂ،ﺷﻐﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭ108&3 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﻣﻘﻄﻊﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺯﺭﻳﺴﺎﺭﳝﲔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻠﻒ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﺍﺀ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻳﺴﺎﺭﻹﺳﺮﺍﻉﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﻣﻘﻄﻊﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﳝﲔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﳝﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﰎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭﳝﲔ xﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﳝﲔﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺳﺮﻳﻌﹰﺎ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺻﻮﺕﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺻﻮﺭﺛﺎﺑﺘ ﹰﺔ ﻣﻦﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ xﻳﻜﻮﻥﳌﻠﻒﻣﻘﻄﻊﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢﺍﻟﺬﻱﰎﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ YY xﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﻷﻭﻝﻋﻠﻰﺃﻧﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ >ﰎ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ< ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺯﺭﻳﺴﺎﺭﳝﲔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ،ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻣﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻹﺳﺮﺍﻉﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﻣﻠﻒﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﳝﲔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻣﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ( ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻘﻄﻊﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ '%10 ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﺳﻢﺍﻠﺪﻭﺍﺳﻢﺍﳌﻠﻒ 100-0010 ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ *40 80~1600 ﻗﻴﻤﺔﻓﺘﺤﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ F16.5 ~ F2.8 ﺳﺮﻋﺔﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 8 ~ 1/1,500 ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ On/Off ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺣﺠﻢﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 3648x2736 ~ 320x240 ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ 2009/01/01 ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ) / ( iﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ) < ( ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲﻭﺿﻊﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﺒﻂﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒﻭﺿﻊﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﺌﺔﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻦﺧﻼﻝﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞﳝﲔﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ) / ( iﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ) < ( ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚﻋﺮﺽﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ،ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﺻﻮﺭﺓﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ،ﻭﺗﺸﺬﻳﺐﻭﺣﻔﻆﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓﻣﻦﺻﻮﺭﺓ i ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﳝﲔﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ >ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ< < i < ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ >ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ< >ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ< tﻋﻨﺪﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﻣﻴﺰﺓﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻓﺌﺔﻓﺈﻥﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻋﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻥﺣﺴﺐﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔﻟﻜﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻋﻄﻼﹰ ،ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ i ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ < >ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰﺓ< >ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ< ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ .&/6ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺯﺭﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ 3 ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ) / ( iﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ) < ( ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔﺑﻜﻞﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ،ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺠﻢﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﻼﺹ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢﻋﺮﺽﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞﺛﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ >ﻧﻌﻢ< ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﲢﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ >ﻻ< ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰﺍﳊﺠﻢﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﰎ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﲟﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢﻓﻲﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮﻣﻦﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻜﺒﱠﺮ ،ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﳝﻜﻨﻚﺃﻳﻀﺎﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﹰ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ 7"8 ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ؟ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ xﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻤﻬﺎ ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ (DISP) /ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ /ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻣﺎﻓﻲﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﻋﻠﻰﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ،ﻳﻌﻤﻞﺯﺭﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪﺯﺭﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪﻋﺪﻡﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﻋﻠﻰﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ،ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺩﻱﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲﻭﺿﻊﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ،ﻳﻌﻤﻞﺯﺭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﻣﺆﻗﺖﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖﻛﻤﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ %*41 ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ %*41 ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ rﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ rﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ rﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ %*41 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ >ﰎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ< ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ >ﰎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ< ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ >ﰎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ< ( ﺯﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ /ﳝﲔ /ﺃﺳﻔﻞ /ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻡﻫﺬﺍﺍﻟﺰﺭﺑﺤﺬﻑﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﺰﻧﺔﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻛﺰﺭ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻳﺴﺎﺭﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺯﺭ ﳝﲔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﳝﲔ ﻛﺰﺭ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﳝﲔﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ،ﺃﻭﻟﻨﻘﻞﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔﺇﻟﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲﻛﺎﻧﺖﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎﻗﺒﻞﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ؟ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ؟ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ >ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ< ﺿﺒﻂ >ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ< ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﳊﺬﻓﻬﺎ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ< ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭﳝﲔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 0,ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 'Oﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ >ﻧﻌﻢ< ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ >ﻻ< ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ iﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓw ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﳝﻜﻦﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒﻭﺿﻊﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻲﻭﺿﻊﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺇﻟﻰﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﳝﻜﻦﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﻛﻤﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺻﻮﺭﺓﺑﻌﺪﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻭﺿﻊﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺃﻭﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ) ( ﻣﺤﺪﺩﳕﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ) ( ﻋﺮﺽﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ( ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ Y 9 9 9 ﳝﲔ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻴﻮﻱ ﻗﺪﱘ ﻫﺎﺩﺉ ﻧﻴﺠﺎﺗﻴﻒ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ Y 9 9 ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ Ô ( ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﻏﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺍﺋﻊ ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ 3(# "$# ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻫﺎﺩﺉ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺭﻳﻔﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻞ ﺣﻴﻮﻱ ﻣﺸﺮﻕ ﻣﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ( '%10 ﻧﺴﺦ ﺿﺒﺎﺏ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻼﺷﻲ ﺗﺄﻣﻞ ﺣﻔﻠﺔ ﻓﺠﺮ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ Ô ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﻟﻜﻞﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﻟﻜﻞﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ _ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔﺗﺪﻋﻢﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ 1JDU#SJEHFﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ، ﻳﹸﺎﻉﺷﻜﻞﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ 64# ﻋﻼﻣﺔﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕﺑﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ 9 ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ - ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ - -FUUFS " " ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ xﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ) ( ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﳊﺠﻢ P ﻗﻢﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺩﻗﺔ ﺣﺠﻢﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔﺣﺪﺩ>ﺻﻮﺭﺓﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ<ﳊﻔﻆﺻﻮﺭﺓﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥﺻﻮﺭﺓﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ P ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ .&/6 ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ>ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﳊﺠﻢ< ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﺛﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ P ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ Pﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ،ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭ (&+1ﻓﻘﻂ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ *"7ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ 8"7 ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ (&+1 ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ >ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ< ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﻭﻟﻜﻦﻓﻲﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ >ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ< ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ( ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ) ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻴﺰﺓ>ﲢﺮﻳﺮ<،ﻳﺘﻢﺣﻔﻆﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔﺑﺤﺠﻢﺃﺻﻐﺮﻣﻦﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﻘﻂﻣﻊﺻﻮﺭ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎﻳﺒﺪﺃﻣﻦ ﻡ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ > ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﳝﲔ < ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ > ﺭﺟﻮﻉ > < ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ > ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ < ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﻓﻲﻋﻜﺲﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ< ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺃﻓﻘﻴﹰﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻦﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔﺇﻟﻰﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ .&/6 ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ< ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﺛﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﺰﻧﺔﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ .&/6 ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ< Öﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﺛﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﳕﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ > Ëﺭﺃﺳﻲ<ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﹰﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﳝﲔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﻊﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﻧﻤﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﳕﻂ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﰎﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﺣﻴﻮﻱ ﰎﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﻏﺎﺑﺔ ﰎﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲﻭﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﻗﺪﱘ ﰎﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂﺗﺪﺭﺝﺑﻨﻲ ﺭﺍﺋﻊ ﰎﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂﺭﺍﺋﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﺉ ﰎﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂﻫﺎﺩﺉ ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ ﰎﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺠﺎﺗﻴﻒ ﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰﺳﻠﺒﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ3(# ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ 3(#ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ( ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ) ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﺼﺺ ﳝﻜﻨﻚﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )Rﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ( ﻭ)Gﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ( )Bﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(. ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﳝﻜﻦﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀﻣﻦﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ. ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ :ﲢﺪﻳﺪ /ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ/ﺃﺳﻔﻞ :ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ) Rﺃﺣﻤﺮ( ﻭ) Gﺃﺧﻀﺮ( ﻭ) Bﺃﺯﺭﻕ( -ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ /ﳝﲔ :ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ .MENU .2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ/ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[ ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ. ) ACB ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎﺿﺒﻂﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ،ﺍﳌﺴﺒﺐﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ. ACB ﲢﺮﻳﻚ 068 OFF ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ /ﳝﲔ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ) ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ .OK .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ[ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. .1ﺣﺪﺩ ) < ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ /ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ[ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊﺟﻌﻞﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓﻓﻲﺇﺣﺪﻯﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻳﻈﻬﺮﻓﻲﺷﻜﻞﻧﻘﻲﻭﺟﻤﻴﻞ. ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ /ﳝﲔ ﺛﻢ .1ﺣﺪﺩ ) ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ .ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ/ﳝﲔ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ OKﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ) ( ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﳝﻜﻨﻚﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ /ﳝﲔ ﺛﻢ .1ﺣﺪﺩ ) ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ .ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ/ﳝﲔ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ OKﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﳝﻜﻨﻚﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺇﺷﺒﺎﻉﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﳝﻜﻨﻚﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. .1ﺣﺪﺩ ) @ ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ /ﳝﲔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ .ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ/ﳝﲔ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ OKﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. .1ﺣﺪﺩ ) ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ /ﳝﲔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ .ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ/ﳝﲔ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ OKﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦﺍﻹﺣﺴﺎﺳﻲﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ /ﳝﲔ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ) ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ .OK .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ[ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ 069 ) ) (Ôﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ( ﻋﺮﺽ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚﻓﻲﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻛﺒﻴﺮﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕﻣﺜﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞﺳﻬﻞ ﳝﻜﻦﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻋﻠﻰﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﻋﺮﺽﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺇﻟﻰﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ .&/6ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ 0,ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ< ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﳝﻜﻦﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂﻓﻲﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ>ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ< ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ< ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﳝﲔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ >ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ< ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ >ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ< ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺋﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﳝﲔ ) (Ôﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻗﻢﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺩﺓ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﳝﻜﻦﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕﺷﺎﺷﺔﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓﻣﻊﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ< ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﳝﲔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ >ﺍﻟﻜﻞ< ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 0,ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ >ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ< ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 0,ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ >ﲢﺪﻳﺪ<ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻷﳝﻦ،ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﳝﻜﻦﺣﻔﻆﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓﻋﻠﻰﺃﻧﻬﺎ>ﲢﺪﻳﺪ<ﻭ>ﲢﺪﻳﺪ<ﻭ>ﲢﺪﻳﺪ< ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖﺣﺪﺩﺕﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻷﻣﺮ>ﲢﺪﻳﺪﺟﺪﻳﺪ<،ﺳﻴﺘﻢﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎﺑﺎﺳﻢ>ﲢﺪﻳﺪ< ﻟﻜﻦﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﻳﺘﻢﺣﻔﻆﺻﻮﺭﺓﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓﻣﺮﺓﺃﺧﺮﻯﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻷﻣﺮ>ﲢﺪﻳﺪﺟﺪﻳﺪ<،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰﺍﻟﺘﻲﰎﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎﺑﺎﺳﻢ>ﲢﺪﻳﺪ<ﺑﺎﺳﻢ>ﲢﺪﻳﺪ<ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎﻋﻠﻰﺇﻧﻬﺎ>ﲢﺪﻳﺪ<ﻭ>ﲢﺪﻳﺪ<ﻭ>ﲢﺪﻳﺪ< ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 'Oﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺪﺩ >ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ< ﺃﻭ >ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ< ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ< ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ >ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ< ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﳝﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﻳﻔﻲ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺣﻴﻮﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ( ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ) (Ôﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ) ﺿﺒﻂﻓﺎﺻﻞﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ< ﺍﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ >ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ< ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﳝﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺬﻑﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ>ﺣﺬﻑ<ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭ ﳝﲔ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ tﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ tﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ tﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ tﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ< ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﺒﻂﺻﻮﺕﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﺒﻂﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ >ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ< ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﳝﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻞﺿﺒﺎﺏ ﺗﺄﻣﻞﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻼﺷﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﺠﺮﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺣﻔﻠﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞﺛﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ >ﲢﺪﻳﺪ<ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﳊﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺯﺭ 'Oﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ 'Oﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﻧﻌﻢ< ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ 0,ﻣﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰﺓ >ﺍﻟﻜﻞ<ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﻧﻌﻢ< ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﳊﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >ﺑﻼ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ< ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﻣﻦﻛﻞﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔﻋﻠﻰﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ، ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢﺣﺬﻑﻛﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ '%10 ﻧﺴﺦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺣﺬﻑ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ؟ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻ ﺿﺒﻂ ) ( ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ >ﺍﻟﻜﻞ< ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﻤﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺿﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ ﺃﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ>ﺣﺬﻑ<،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ< tﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺪﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ %$*. ﺗﺬﻛﺮﺃﻥﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﻤﻴﺔﲤﺎﻣﹰﺎ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔﻋﻠﻰﺟﻬﺎﺯﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﻗﺒﻞﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻱﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﺘﻢﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﻭﻟﻦﻳﺘﻢﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎﺣﺘﻰﺇﺫﺍﰎ ﺣﺬﻑﻛﺎﻓﺔﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ؟ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﻫﺬﺍﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓﻣﻦﺍﳌﺴﺢﻋﻦﻏﻴﺮﻗﺼﺪ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﺎﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻠﻐﻲﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﻟﺘﻲﻛﺎﻧﺖﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ>ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ<ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭ ﳝﲔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞﺛﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ >ﲢﺪﻳﺪ<ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎﲢﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﺭ 'Oﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ '%10 ﻧﺴﺦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ '%10 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺿﺒﻂ >ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ< ﺿﺒﻂ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ >ﺟﺎﻫﺰﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ< ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ >ﰎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ< ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﰎ ﺣﻔﻆﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﳌﺪﺓﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ) ( ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ '%10 ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ' %10ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺇﺩﻣﺎﺝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ .*4$ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﻗﻢﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎﻭﻋﺪﺩﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ '%10ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ' %10ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ '%10ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮﻭﺍﻷﳝﻦﻋﻠﻴﻚﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦﺃﻥﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔﺑﻚﺗﺪﻋﻢﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺫﺍﺕﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﺗﻄﺒﻊﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﻋﻨﺪﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔﺻﻮﺭﺓﻓﻲﻣﻌﻤﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ،ﺍﻃﻠﺐﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔ tﺣﺴﺐﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ،ﻓﺈﻥﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔﻓﻲﺍﲡﺎﻩﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦﻋﺪﻡﻃﺒﻌﻬﺎﻓﻲﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺑﺘﻀﻤﲔﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕﻛﻤﻴﺔﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔﻋﻠﻰﺻﻮﺭﺓﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >' <%10ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﳝﲔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﳝﲔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ >ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ< ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞﺛﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ >ﲢﺪﻳﺪ<ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ >ﺍﻟﻜﻞ<ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ >ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ< ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ '%10ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ' %10 ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ' %10ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ 01 ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ) ( ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺗﺘﻢﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡﻭﻣﻠﻒﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﺑﺼﻔﺘﻬﺎﻧﻮﻉﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >' <%10ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﳝﲔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﻓﻬﺮﺱ< ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺘﻢﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲﺣﺎﻟﺔﲢﺪﻳﺪ>ﻧﻌﻢ<ﺗﺘﻢﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ >ﻻ< ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﺰﻧﺔﻋﻠﻰﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ>ﺍﳊﺠﻢ<ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔﻣﻊﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ '%10 ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ '%10 ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ؟ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >' <%10ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﳝﲔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺍﳊﺠﻢ< ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺘﻢﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞﺛﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ >ﲢﺪﻳﺪ<ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺯﺭ 'Oﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺍﻟﻜﻞ<ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ >ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ<ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ '%10 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ 3X5 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ '> %10ﺍﳊﺠﻢ<ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ،¨ ،¨ ، ¨ ¨ ، ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ tﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻭﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ،ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔﳌﻌﺎﳉﺘﻪ ( ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ) ﻧﺴﺦ ﳝﻜﻨﻚﻫﺬﺍﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻦﻧﺴﺦﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ،ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ،ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﺇﻟﻰﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ >ﻧﺴﺦ< ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰﺃﺳﻔﻞﺛﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻧﻌﻢ '%10 ﻧﺴﺦ ﻻ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ >ﻧﻌﻢ<ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ،ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔﻓﻲﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔﺇﻟﻰﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﺑﻌﺪﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ>ﻧﺴﺦ<ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ،ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ >ﻻ< ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ wﻧﺴﺦi tﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ،ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ >ﻧﺴﺦ< ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ>ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ<ﻭﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡﺇﻟﻰﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦﺣﺬﻑﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔﻹﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻗﺒﻞﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﻓﻲﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ >ﻧﺴﺦ< ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ، ﺳﻴﺘﻢﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲﻣﻦﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕﻓﻲﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ< ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ< ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﰎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ >ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ< ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ< ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ >ﻧﺴﺦ< ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﰎ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ PictBridge ﻳﻤﻜﻦﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ 64#ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ 1JDU#SJEHFﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ 64# ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ،ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 0, ﺗﺘﻢﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔﺣﺎﻟﻴﹰﺎﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ xﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ > <64#ﻋﻠﻰ >ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ< ﺻﻔﺤﺔ xﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﻜﹼ ﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ > <64#ﻋﻠﻰ >ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ< ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ PictBridge : ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ PictBridge : ﳝﻜﻦﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1JDU#SJEHF ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ< ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﳝﲔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔﺛﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺪﺩ >ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ< ﺃﻭ >ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ< ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚﻓﻴﻬﺎﺿﺒﻂﻋﺪﺩﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎﻫﻮﻣﻮﺿﺢﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ 0OF1JD ﳝﻜﻨﻚﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢﺣﺠﻢﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ،ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ،ﻭﻧﻮﻉﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ،ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ،ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ،ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢﺍﳌﻠﻒﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺍﳌﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1JDU#SJEHF ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭﳝﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ 4x6 ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ L ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ 2L ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ 1 ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ >ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ >ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ<< ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﺒﻂﺣﺠﻢﻭﺭﻕﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺿﺒﻂﻋﺪﺩﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﻛﺎﻣﻞ، ، ، ، ، ، ، ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﺿﺒﻂﺟﻮﺩﺓﻭﺭﻕﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ،ﻋﺎﺩﻱ،ﺻﻮﺭ،ﺻﻮﺭﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﺿﺒﻂﺟﻮﺩﺓﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ،ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ،ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ،ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﺿﺒﻂﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥﺳﺘﺘﻢﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ،ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ،ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥﺳﺘﺘﻢﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ،ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ،ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ (ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ >ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ >ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ<< ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ >ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ< ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﳝﲔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪﲢﺪﻳﺪﺻﻮﺭﺓﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺣﺪﺩﻋﺪﺩﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﳊﻔﻈﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺑﺪﻭﻥﺿﺒﻂﻋﺪﺩﻣﺮﺍﺕﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕﺑﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ ،ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ"،¨، " - - -FUUFS ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 0 0OF1JD ﺍﺳﻢﺍﳌﻠﻒ xﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻲﺣﺎﻟﺔﻋﺪﻡﺩﻋﻤﻬﺎ،ﻳﺘﻢﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢﻋﻠﻰﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ،ﻟﻜﻦﻟﻦﳝﻜﻦﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ PictBridge : ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻳﻘﻮﻡﺑﺒﺪﺀﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲﻗﺎﻡﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡﺑﺒﺪﺀﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲﻗﺎﻡﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ< ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﳝﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ >ﻧﻌﻢ<ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ >ﻻ< ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻻ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻌﻢ tﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃ ﹴﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦﺍﻟﺘﻲﺗﻜﻮﻥﻋﺮﺿﺔﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓﻭﺗﻠﻚﺍﻟﺘﻲﲢﺘﻮﻱﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻸﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﺍﳊﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺿﺒﻂ xﺗﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ،ﺍﺭﺟﻊﺇﻟﻰﺩﻟﻴﻞﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ tﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻸﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﻨﺎﻓﺜﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺛﻮﺑﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﻴﺔﻣﻦﺟﻴﻞﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻴﻜﺎﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎﻭﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ tﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺟﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻞ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺣﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﺜﺮﺑﻬﺎﺍﻟﺮﻣﻞ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ tﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﹰﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐﺣﺪﻭﺙﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓﻻﺗﺤﻤﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﹰﺃﻭﺗﻘﻢﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎﻭﻳﺪﻙﻣﺒﺘﻠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻼ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻞﻳﺪﺧﻞﺇﻟﻰﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻳﻘﻮﻡﺑﺒﺪﺀﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲﻗﺎﻡﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ tﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻱ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ tﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃ ﹴﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦﺍﻟﺘﻲﺗﻜﻮﻥﻋﺮﺿﺔﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓﻭﺗﻠﻚﺍﻟﺘﻲﲢﺘﻮﻱﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻸﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﺍﳊﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ tﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﲡﻤﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺇﺫﺍﻟﻢﺗﻘﻢﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻬﺎﳝﻜﻦﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻕﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔﻣﻊﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﻢﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒﺟﺴﻢﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔﻗﻤﺎﺵﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻻﺗﻘﻢﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾﺍﶈﺎﻟﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔﻛﺎﻟﺒﻨﺰﻭﻝﻭﺍﳌﺒﻴﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺸﺮﻳﺔﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦﺍﶈﺎﻟﻴﻞ ﻗﺪﻳﺆﺩﻱﺫﻟﻚﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒﻫﻴﻜﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻛﻤﺎﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮﻋﻠﻰﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻗﺪﻳﺆﺩﻱﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞﺑﺨﺸﻮﻧﺔﻣﻊﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺇﻟﻰﺗﻠﻒﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺠﺐﺃﻥﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺃﻱﺗﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆﺑﻬﺎﻓﻲﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔﺍﳊﻤﻞﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔﻓﻲﻛﻞﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕﺍﻟﺘﻲﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﻓﻴﻬﺎﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻸﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﻨﺎﻓﺜﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺛﻮﺑﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﻴﺔﻣﻦﺟﻴﻞﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻴﻜﺎﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎﻭﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ tﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺟﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻞ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺣﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﺜﺮﺑﻬﺎﺍﻟﺮﻣﻞ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ tﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﹰﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐﺣﺪﻭﺙﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓﻻﺗﺤﻤﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﹰﺃﻭﺗﻘﻢﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎﻭﻳﺪﻙﻣﺒﺘﻠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻼ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻞﻳﺪﺧﻞﺇﻟﻰﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﻻ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃ ﹴﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍﺃﻱﺿﺮﺭﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚﻻﻳﻌﺪﺧﻠﻼﹰﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ،ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﻲﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ،ﺍﻓﺼﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ 64#ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ tﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ،ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔﻓﻲﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻗﻢﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢﻗﺒﻞﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻫﻨﺎﻙﲢﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓﻗﺪﺗﻈﻬﺮﻋﻠﻰﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ >ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ< tﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ >ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ< tﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ 4%4%)$ﺃﺯﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ >ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ< tﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ tﺧﻄﺄﻓﻲﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ >ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ< tﻫﻨﺎﻙﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽﻓﻲﺳﻌﺔﻃﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ >ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ< tﻟﻢﻳﺘﻢﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ >ﺑﻼ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ< tﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻳﺮﺟﻰﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪﳑﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻻﻳﺘﻢﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﻫﻨﺎﻙﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽﻓﻲﺳﻌﺔﻃﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ tﰎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺃﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ، ﺗﻮﻗﻒﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ tﻧﻔﺪﺕﺷﺤﻨﺔﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ tﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻋﻦﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ tﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻋﻨﺪﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﺗﻮﺟﺪﺳﻌﺔﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ tﻟﻢﺗﺘﻢﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ tﰎﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺭﻛﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ tﰎﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ >ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ< tﰎﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﻃﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﰎﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩﻃﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺭﻛﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ tﰎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺃﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻓﺠﺄﺓﻋﻦﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞﻭﻫﻲﻗﻴﺪﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ tﺗﻮﻗﻒﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔﻟﻌﻄﻞ ﺃﺯﻝﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ tﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺻﻮﺭﺓﻟﻠﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩﺩﻭﻥﺿﺒﻂﻭﺿﻊﺍﳌﺎﻛﺮﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱﻳﻨﺎﺳﺒﻬﺎ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ tﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂﺻﻮﺭﺓﺧﺎﺭﺝﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ tﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ tﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ tﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻻﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻻﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ tﻟﻢﻳﺘﻢﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﺸﻜ ﹴﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ tﻭﺟﻮﺩﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﲔ tﰎﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ FYQMPSFSﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ >ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ< tﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ tﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻴﺲ 8JOEPXT، 91، 7JTUB .BD 04ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ 64# ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ 8JOEPXT، 91، 7JTUB .BD 04ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ 64# ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ tﻋﻄﻞﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺪﻭﺙﺧﻄﺄﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ tﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓﻏﻴﺮﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻﻳﺘﻢﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ tﺍﺳﻢﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻏﻴﺮﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ '%$ ﻻ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑﻟﻮﻥﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﻋﻦﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ tﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾﺃﻭﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﻏﻴﺮﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ tﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥﺃﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙﻧﻘﻄﺔﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ tﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪ ﰎ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ،ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻻﺗﻀﻲﺀﻓﻲﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ،ﻭﻗﺪﺗﻈﻬﺮﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻋﻴﺒﹰﺎ ﻣﺨﻼ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﻈﻬﺮﺧﻂﺭﺃﺳﻲﻋﻠﻰﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻟﻸﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ tﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺿﻮﺍ ﹰﺀ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ wﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﻪ ،iﻭﻫﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ،ﻓﻀﻼﹰ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺗﻌﺪﻋﻴﺒﹰﺎﻣﺨﻼﹰﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ $$%ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ "QQSPYﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ "QQSPYﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ 4)%ﺇ_ﱈ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﱈ _ ﱈ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ' 5 ' _ 8 ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ rﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ 9 _9 rﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 9_ 9ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ %*4ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﺗﻴﻠﻲ ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻢ ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻢ ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ _ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ _ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ، ﻟﻴﻞ _ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺖ &"ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ،ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ،ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ"& ،ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ &7 &7ﺧﻄﻮﺓ *40ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ، ، ، ﻣﺪﻯ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻡ _ ﻡ ،ﺗﻴﻠﻲ _ﻡ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﺍﳊﺪﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ،ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ،ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ،ﺣﻴﻮﻱ ،ﺣﻴﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ،ﻧﻬﺎﺭ،ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ،ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻋﺎﻝ ،ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ،ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﲔ،ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ 55-ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ '"ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭ '" ﻭﺳﻂﻭ '"ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ،ﺇﺻﻼﺡﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺤﺪﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ 5'5ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ،ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀﻭﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ،ﻓﻼﺵﺍﳌﻞﺀ،ﺍﳌﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ، ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ،ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ،ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻣﻦﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ،%*4،ﻟﻘﻄﺔﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ،ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ،ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ،ﻟﻴﻞ،ﺻﻮﺭﺓﺷﺨﺺ ،ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ،ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ،ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻗﺮﻳﺐ، ﻧﺺ ،ﺇﻏﺮﻭﺏ ،ﻓﺠﺮ ،ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﺷﺎﻃﺊ ﻭﺛﻠﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ،ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ"&# ، ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ،ﻧﺺﺍﳌﺎﻛﺮﻭ،ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ،ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ،ﺣﺪﺙ،ﺣﺎﻣﻞﺛﻼﺛﻲ، ﻟﻴﻞ،ﺻﻮﺭﺓﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ،ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ،ﺻﻮﺭﺓﺑﺈﺿﺎﺀﺓﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ،ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ،ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ،ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ rﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ،ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ rﺍﳊﺠﻢ Y ،Y rﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ rﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﻭﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ rﲢﺮﻳﺮﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻀﻤﻦﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ،ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ rﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ rﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ..$ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ 4%ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ 4%)$ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ rﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ '1JDU#SJEHF ،%10' ،&9*' ،+1&(%$ rﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ (&"7* .+1 rﺻﻮﺕ 8"7 ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 9 9 9 9 9 9 ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ (# ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔﺟﺪﹰﺍ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ xﰎ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﲟﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﱋ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺪﺓ ،ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ،ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﲢﺮﻳﺮﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ،ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ،ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،"$#ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ،ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ،ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ،ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ،ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ، ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ،ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ،ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ،ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ،ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ xﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ 9 ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ 1"-،/54$ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ 7 ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ64# ﺻﻮﺕﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ (1050mAh) 3.7V ,SLB-10A ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ 46$$ 4"$ xﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ Yﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ Yﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ 99 oﻣﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ _ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ _ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ 4BNTVOH.BTUTFSﻭ "EPCF 3FBEFS xﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ xﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻠﻜﻴ ﹰﺔ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﲔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻳﺮﺟﻰﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓﺩﻟﻴﻞﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔﻗﺒﻞﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻃﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﹰﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻞ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ،ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊﻟﻦﻳﻜﻮﻥﻣﺸﻤﻮﻻ ﹰﺑﻀﻤﺎﻥﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﱋ ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ8JOEPXT ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ 64# ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﲟﻌﺎﻟﺞﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ *** 1FOUJVN ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ *** 1FOUJVNﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ 8JOEPXT 91 7JTUB ﺣﺪﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ، ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖﻣﻦﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ، ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ¨ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ ،ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔﺑﺖ ﻳﻮﺻﻰﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺷﺎﺷﺔﻋﺮﺽﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺖ .JDSPTPGU %JSFDU9 $ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.BDJOUPTI ( 1PXFS .BDﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ .BD 04ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺣﺪﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ، ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ، xﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ 8JOEPXT 91ﻭ7JTUB CJU&EJUJPO xﻟﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﱋ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﲢﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﲟﺎﻓﻲﺫﻟﻚﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﺍﻤﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ،ﻳﺠﺐﺃﻥﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ Úﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲﻫﺬﺍﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔﺍﻹﳒﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔﻣﻦﻧﻈﺎﻡﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 8JOEPXT 4BNTVOH .BTUFSﳝﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﻼﹰ ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﳝﻜﻨﻚﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔﺑﻚ،ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ،ﻭﲢﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻫﺬﺍﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻫﺬﺍﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖﻣﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ 8JOEPXTﻓﻘﻂ tﻳﺠﺐﺃﻥﺗﺴﻤﺢﲟﺮﻭﺭ _ ﺛﻮﺍ ﹴﻥ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻓﻲﺣﺎﻟﺔﻋﺪﻡﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ،ﻗﻢﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ> <8JOEPXT &YQMPSFSﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ > <*OTUBMMFSFYFﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﺭﻱ ﶈﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻣﻊﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻗﻢﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥﻳﺘﻢﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﺫﻟﻚ،ﳝﻜﻦﻧﻘﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﺰﻧﺔﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺇﻟﻰﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﻭﳝﻜﻦﲢﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ %JSFDU9ﻭ4BNTVOH .BTUFSﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﺭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﺔﻣﻦ %JSFDU9ﻗﺪ ﰎ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻓﺮﲟﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ %JSFDU9 tﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﱋ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ IUUQiXXXTBNTVOHDBNFSB DPNﺍﻹﳒﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ IUUQXXXTBNTVOHDBNFSBDPLSﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻧﻘﺮﻓﻮﻕﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ>ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ<ﻓﻲﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ 64# ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ>ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞﰎﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭﻋﻠﻰﺟﻬﺎﺯﺟﺪﻳﺪ<ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ xﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﻮ ،8JOEPXT 917JTUB ﺳﻴﺘﻢﻓﺘﺢﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞﻋﺎﺭﺽﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ tﰎ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ '1%ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺍﺑﺤﺚﻓﻲﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ '1%ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ 8JOEPXTﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺢﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ '1%ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ "EPCF 3FBEFSﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔﻗﻢﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ "EPCF 3FBEFSﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡﲤﻜﲔﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ "EPCF 3FBEFSﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺑﺎﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ tﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ "EPCF3FBEFSﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ *OUFSOFU &YQMPSFSﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ iXXXNJDSPTPGUDPNwﻭﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ *OUFSOFU&YQMPSFS ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲﺣﺎﻟﺔﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞﻛﺎﺑﻞ 64#ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ 64#ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺛﻢ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ،ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ iﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮw ﻓﻲﻫﺬﺍﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ،ﻳﻤﻜﻦﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹﺑﻚﻣﻦﺧﻼﻝﻛﺎﺑﻞ 64# ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ 64#ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ،ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ xﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ > <64#ﻋﻠﻰ>ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ< ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹﺑﻚﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ 64# ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ >ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ<ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮﻧﻘﺮﹰﺍﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﹰ ﺎﻓﻮﻕ>ﻗﺮﺹﻗﺎﺑﻞﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ <44$". %$*. ﺳﻴﺘﻢﺑﻌﺪﺫﻟﻚﻋﺮﺽﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﺮﻓﻮﻕﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ>ﻗﺺ<ﺃﻭ>ﻧﺴﺦ< >ﻗﺺ< ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ >ﻧﺴﺦ< ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ > ،<4BNTVOH .BTUFSﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓﹰﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚﻧﺴﺦﺃﻭﻧﻘﻞﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ tﻭﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺪﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻣﻦﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓﹰﺇﻟﻰﻓﺼﻞﻏﻴﺮﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ tﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ>ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ<ﻋﻠﻰﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲﻭﺿﻊﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ>ﻟﺼﻖ< ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹﺑﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ 8JOEPXT 91 7JTUB ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ 8 JOEPXT ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻘﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍﻭﻣﻀﺖﻟﻤﺒﺔﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ،ﻓﻴﹸﺮﺟﻰﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭﺇﻟﻰﺃﻥﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲﺍﻟﻠﻤﺒﺔﻣﻦﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥﻣﻀﺎﺀﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ >ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ< ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ< ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ >ﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ< ﺍﻧﻘﺮﻓﻮﻕﺯﺭ>ﺇﻏﻼﻕ<ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻢﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﹰﺍ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﹰ ﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ >ﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ< ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓﻋﻠﻰﺷﺮﻳﻂﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ >ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ< ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ >ﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ< ﺣﺪﺩ>ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ 64#ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ< ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ< ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ >ﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ< ﺣﺪﺩ>ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ 64#ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ< ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ< ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ 64# Samsung Master ﳝﻜﻨﻚﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔﺑﻚ،ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ،ﻭﲢﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻫﺬﺍﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻫﺬﺍﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖﻣﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ 8JOEPXTﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ >ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ <4BNTVOH .BTUFS 4BNTVOH ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﺍﳋﺎﺹﺑﻚ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺯﺭ >ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ< ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ >ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ< ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚﺣﻔﻆﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻠﺪﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ< ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎﻭﺍﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺑﻬﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ < ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﹰﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢﻋﺮﺽﻭﺟﻬﺔﺍﻠﺪﺍﶈﺪﺩﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮﻓﻮﻕﺯﺭ>ﺑﺪﺀ<ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ < ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ Samsung Master ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ،ﲢﺮﻳﺮ،ﻋﺮﺽ،ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ،ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ،ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ،ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻭﲢﺮﻳﺮﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡﻣﻦﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻯ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻠﺪ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ > <5PPMTﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ< ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ< > <"EKVTUﺿﺒﻂ > <3FUPVDIﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ< ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ xﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ< ﻓﻲ 4BNTVOH.BTUFSﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ xﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 4BNTVOH .BTUFSﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ xﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ< ﻓﻲ 4BNTVOH .BTUFSﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ Samsung Master ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ،ﻭﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ،ﻭﺭﻭﺍﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻌﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﻄﻊﻓﻴﻠﻢ xﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺿﻐﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ 4BNTVOH .BTUFSﻓﻲ 4BNTVOH .BTUFS xﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ< ﻓﻲ 4BNTVOH .BTUFSﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ > <"EE .FEJBﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ > <&EJU$MJQﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ،ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ > <&GGFDUTﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ > <4FU 5FYUﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ > </BSSBUFﺭﻭﺍﻳﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﲢﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ > <1SPEVDFﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ* 8JOEPXT NFEJB BTG ، 8JOEPXT NFEJB XNW ،"7 ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ USBﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ MAC ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ USBﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻛﻴﻨﺘﻮﺵ MAC ﺑﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ 64#ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ."$ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻷﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ $".ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻛﻴﻨﺘﻮﺵ ."$ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻣﻊﻧﻈﺎﻡﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ."$ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻛﻴﻨﺘﻮﺵ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻛﻴﻨﺘﻮﺵ ."$ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﹰﺍ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﹰ ﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺑﺎﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ."$ tﻗﻢ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺃﻣﺮﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀﻓﺤﺺﻣﺎﻳﻠﻲﻓﻲﺣﺎﻟﺔﻭﺟﻮﺩﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ 64# ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ 64#ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﻪ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ 64#ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ 64#ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻻﳝﻜﻦﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧ ﹰﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ >ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ< ﻓﻲ %FWJDF .BOBHFS ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ 64#ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ 64#ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙﺧﻄﺄﻏﻴﺮﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀﻧﻘﻞﻣﻠﻒ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ 64# ﺭﲟﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ 64#ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﻭﻣﺤﻮﺭ 64# ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳑﻜﻨﹰﺎ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓﹰ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﺃﻗﻮﻡﺑﻔﺘﺢﻣﺪﻳﺮﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮﻓﻮﻕﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓﺃﺧﺮﻯﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺒﻬﺎﻋﻼﻣﺔﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻡﺻﻔﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ؟ﺃﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓﺗﻮﺟﺪﺑﺠﺎﻧﺒﻬﺎﻋﻼﻣﺔﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻡ ؟ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺩiﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔw ﻡ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ /PSUPO "OUJ 7JSVT ،7ﺇﻟﺦ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﻛﻘﺮﺹﻗﺎﺑﻞﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﰎﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﲟﻨﻔﺬ 64#ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﲟﻨﻔﺬ 64#ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺭﲟﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﲟﻨﻔﺬ 64#ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻫﻞﰎﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ 64#ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ؟ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻧﺎﻗﻞﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻋﺎﳌﻲ 64#ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ 64#ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ،ﻭﺃﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺎﻗﻞﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲﻋﺎﳌﻲ 64#ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ؟ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ %JSFDU9$ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ %JSFDU9$ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞﺑﺸﻜﻞﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖﻫﺬﺍﻋﻠﻰﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎﻣﻦﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﲡﻤﻴﻊﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻠﺪ > <$%30.ESJWF=%JSFDU9ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ %94&561FYF ﻭﺳﻮﻑﻳﺘﻢﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ%JSFDU9ﻗﻢﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲﻟﺘﺰﻳﻞ %JSFDU9IUUQXXXNJDSPTPGUDPNEJSFDU ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺑﺪﺀ 8JOEPXT ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ،ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ 8JOEPXT ﻭﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﻴﺒﺎﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﺮﻩﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲﺑﺈﻟﻘﺎﺋﻪﻣﻊﻏﻴﺮﻩﻣﻦﺍﻠﻔﺎﺕﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯﻭﺣﺮﺻﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔﻣﻦﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽﻷﻱﺿﺮﺭ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻞﻣﻦ ﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺﻣﻦ ﺍﻠﻔﺎﺕﺑﺸﻜﻞﻏﻴﺮﻣﻘﲍ،ﻳﺮﺟﻰﻓﺼﻞﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞﻋﻦﻏﻴﺮﻩﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉﺍﻠﻔﺎﺕﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯﻭﻗﻢﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻪﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺪﻱﺗﺮﻭﻳﺠﺎ ﹰﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩﺑﺸﻜﻞﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﻭﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲﻋﻠﻰﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝﺇﻣﺎﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻭﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻫﺬﺍﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ،ﺃﻭﲟﻜﺘﺐﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔﺍﶈﻠﻲﺍﳌﻌﻨﻲ،ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔﺣﻮﻝﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦﻫﺬﺍﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞﺑﺸﻜﻞﻻ ﻳﻀﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻳﻀﻤﻦﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻪﺑﺸﻜﻞﺁﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺎﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲﻋﻠﻰﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲﻫﺬﻩﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝﺑﺎﳌﻮﺭﺩﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖﻣﻦﺑﻨﻮﺩﻭﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻋﻘﺪﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀﻻﻳﺠﻮﺯﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺﻣﻦﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞﲟﺰﺟﻪﻣﻊﻏﻴﺮﻩﻣﻦﺍﻠﻔﺎﺕﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ،ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂﺩﻋﻢ -FHBDZ64#ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻴﺮﺍﺙ 64#ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ #*04 ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ #*04ﺑﲔ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ #*04 ﻋﻠﻰﺩﻋﻢﻣﻴﺮﺍﺙ 64#ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ،ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﺃﻭﺷﺮﻛﺔﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ #*04 ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔﺧﻄﺄﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀﻧﻘﻞﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ 4BNTVOH.BTUFSﻓﻘﻂ ،ﲢﺪﺙ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ 4BNTVOH.BTUFSﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ 4BNTVOH.BTUFSﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ 4BNTVOHﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﻋﻼﻣﺔﺷﻌﺎﺭ 4BNTVOHﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ 4BNTVOHﺍﻟﺼﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻼﺋﻬﺎﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔﲤﺜﻞﺟﻬﻮﺩ 4BNTVOHﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕﻻﺗﺆﺛﺮﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ
